Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

the places of assembly

  • 1 Peter the Great (Pyotr Alekseyevich Romanov)

    SUBJECT AREA: Ports and shipping
    [br]
    b. 10 June 1672 (30 May 1672 Old Style) Moscow, Russia
    d. 8 February 1725 (28 January 1725 Old Style) St Petersburg, Russia
    [br]
    Russian Tsar (1682–1725), Emperor of all the Russias (1722–5), founder of the Russian Navy, shipbuilder and scientist; as a shipbuilder he was known by the pseudonym Petr Mikhailov.
    [br]
    Peter the Great was a man with a single-minded approach to problems and with passionate and lifelong interests in matters scientific, military and above all maritime. The unusual and dominating rule of his vast lands brought about the age of Russian enlightenment, and ensured that his country became one of the most powerful states in Europe.
    Peter's interest in ships and shipbuilding started in his childhood; c. 1687 he had an old English-built day sailing boat repaired and launched, and on it he learned the rudiments of sailing and navigation. This craft (still preserved in St Petersburg) became known as the "Grandfather of the Russian Navy". In the years 1688 to 1693 he established a shipyard on Lake Plestsheev and then began his lifelong study of shipbuilding by visiting and giving encouragement to the industry at Archangelsk on the White Sea and Voronezh in the Sea of Azov. In October 1696, Peter took Azov from the Turks, and the Russian Fleet ever since has regarded that date as their birthday. Setting an example to the young aristocracy, Peter travelled to Western Europe to widen his experience and contacts and also to learn the trade of shipbuilding. He worked in the shipyards of Amsterdam and then at the Naval Base of Deptford on the Thames.
    The war with Sweden concentrated his attention on the Baltic and, to establish a base for trading and for the Navy, the City of St Petersburg was constructed on marshland. The Admiralty was built in the city and many new shipyards in the surrounding countryside, one being the Olonez yard which in 1703 built the frigate Standart, the first for the Baltic Fleet, which Peter himself commanded on its first voyage. The military defence of St Petersburg was effected by the construction of Kronstadt, seawards of the city.
    Throughout his life Peter was involved in ship design and it is estimated that one thousand ships were built during his reign. He introduced the building of standard ship types and also, centuries ahead of its time, the concept of prefabrication, unit assembly and the building of part hulls in different places. Officially he was the designer of the ninety-gun ship Lesnoe of 1718, and this may have influenced him in instituting Rules for Shipbuilders and for Seamen. In 1716 he commanded the joint fleets of the four naval powers: Denmark, Britain, Holland and Russia.
    He established the Marine Academy, organized and encouraged exploration and scientific research, and on his edict the St Petersburg Academy of Science was opened. He was not averse to the recruitment of foreigners to key posts in the nation's service. Peter the Great was a remarkable man, with the unusual quality of being a theorist and an innovator, in addition to the endowments of practicality and common sense.
    [br]
    Further Reading
    Robert K.Massie, 1981, Peter the Great: His Life and Work, London: Gollancz.
    Henri Troyat, 1979, Pierre le Grand; pub. in English 1988 as Peter the Great, London: Hamish Hamilton (a good all-round biography).
    AK / FMW

    Biographical history of technology > Peter the Great (Pyotr Alekseyevich Romanov)

  • 2 curia

    cūrĭa, ae, f. [kindr. with Quiris, Quirites; cf. the letter C], a curia or court, one of the thirty parts into which Romulus divided the Roman people, ten for each of the three tribes; each curia contained ten gentes, Varr. ap. Dion. Hal. 2, 83; Liv. 1, 13, 6; Aur. Vict. Vir. Ill. 2, 12; Dig. 1, 2, 2; Paul. ex Fest. p. 49, 1 Müll.—
    II.
    Meton.
    A.
    A structure built for the religious services of a curia (sometimes also serving for other purposes), Varr. L. L. 5, § 155 Müll.; Fest. p. 174, 6 ib.: veteres, on the east side of the Palatine Hill, Varr. l. l. ib.; Tac. A. 12, 24;

    called curia prisca,

    Ov. F. 3, 140; Fest. l. l.: Novae, id. l. l.—
    2.
    Hence, dies curiae, a festival day, Cic. de Or. 1, 7. 27.—Hence,
    B. 1.
    Commonly kat exochên, the Curia Hostilia built by Tullus Hostilius (in reference to the later Curia Julia and Pompeiana, v. infra), the Curia, Senate-house, Varr. L. L. 5, § 155 Müll.; Liv. 1, 30, 2; Plin. 35, 4, 7, § 22; Varr. L. L. 6, § 46; id. Fragm. ap. Non. p. 57, 5; Cic. Rep. 2, 17, 31; id. Cat. 4, 1, 2; id. Fl. 24, 57; id. Mil. 33, 89; Quint. 11, 1, 47; Ov. M. 15, 802. —
    2.
    Curia Julia, the Senate-house begun by Julius Cæsar, finished by the triumvirs, and used by the Senate after the burning of the Curia Hostilia, Suet. Calig. 60.—
    3.
    Curia Pompeji or Pompeja, the Senate-house built by Pompey, finally closed after the assassination of Julius Cæsar in it, Cic. Div. 2, 9, 23; Suet. Caes. 80 sq. et saep.—Hence, trop., as emblem of law:

    stante urbe et curiā,

    Cic. Planc. 29, 71:

    pro curia inversique mores,

    Hor. C. 3, 5, 7;

    of the senatorial rank: curia pauperibus clausa est,

    Ov. Am. 3, 8, 55.—
    C.
    Of the places of assembly of high councils out of Rome, Cic. Att. 6, 1, 6; id. Verr. 2, 2, 21, § 50; Liv. 24, 24, 4; Ov. M. 13, 197; Juv. 9, 101.—
    D.
    The assembly of the Senate, the Senate (cf. Cic. de Or. 3, 42, 167):

    a curiā nulla me res divellet,

    Cic. Att. 1, 20, 3:

    aliquem in curiam introducere,

    Liv. 22, 1, 14; 2, 23, 11 sq.; 2, 24, 3; Suet. Caes. 22; id. Aug. 38; Hor. C. 2, 1, 14 et saep.—
    E.
    Curia Calabra, so called from the proclamation of the dates which was there made; v. Calabra.—
    F.
    Curia Saliorum, the official building of the Salii on the Palatine Hill, consecrated to Mars, in which the sacred lituus was kept, Cic. Div. 1, 17, 30.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > curia

  • 3 VÉ

    I)
    n.
    1) mansion, house; byggja vé goða, to dwell in the homes of the gods;
    2) temple, sanctuary (vega víg í véum).
    n. pl. standard (poet.).
    * * *
    n. [a form vés would answer to Ulf. weihs or wehs, n. = κώμη, ἀγρός; Hel. uuih = templum; the identity of this word with the Lat. vicus and Gr. οικος is indubitable, the abbreviation being analogous to fé and pecu; whereas Goth. weihs = holy is prop. a different root word, see vígja; for the double sense of Lat. aedes and templum does not depend on the etymology, but is analogous to what has taken place in the word hof, q. v.]
    A. A mansion, house, Lat. aedes, this is the original sense, then a sanctuary, temple, cp. hof; til vés heilags, to the holy mansion, Hdl. 1; alda vé, the home of men, i. e. the earth, Hm. 107; Út-vé, Üt-garðr, the outer-mansion, of the outskirt of the earth, where the giants live, Þd.; ginnunga vé, the mansion of the gods, the heavens, Haustl. 15; byggja vé goða, to dwell in the homes of the gods, Vþm. 51; hapta vé, the places of gods = holy places, Vellekla; vé mána, the moon’s mansion, i. e. the heavens, Edda i. 330 (in a verse); valda véum, to rule house, dwell, reside, Gm. 13; svá mikils virðu goðin vé sín ok griða-staði, at eigi vildu þau saurga þá með blóði úlfsins, Edda 20; öll Vandils-vé, the land of V., Hkv. 2. 33: allit., vé ok vangr, frá mínum véum ok vöngum skolu þér æ jafnan köld ráð koma (sec vangr), Ls. 51.
    II. a temple; öll vé banda, all the temples of the gods, and hapta vé, id., Vellekla; granda véum, to violate the temples, Hkr. i. (in a verse); vés valdr, the lord of the vé, i. e. lord of the county, or = temple-lord (?), an epithet applied to the Earl Sigurd, Kormak.
    2. the law phrase, vega víg í véum, to slay a man in a sanctuary (a temple, an assembly, or the like); hann vá víg í véum ok varð útlægr, Landn. 80; Özurr vá víg í véum á Upplöndum, þá er hann váf í brúðför með Sigurði hrisa, fyrir þat varð hann landflótti til Íslands, 304; Erpr lútandi vá víg í véum ok var ætlaðr til dráps, Skáldatal 252; vargr í véum (see vargr), Fms. xi. 40; Eyvindr hafði vegit í véum ok var hann vargr orðinn, Eg. 259: also in the obscure passage, Grág., Þ.Þ. ch. 24, ‘um vés úti,’ perh. ‘um vés útan,’ = outside the court, absent from court, of a judge prevented through sickness from being in his place in court, Grág. (Kb.) i. 76, l. 3.
    B. Vé, in local names, Vé-björg = Vi-borg in Denmark, Fms.; Vis-torf, Thork. Dipl.: Véar, f. pl. (like Torgar, Nesjar), Munch’s Norg. Beskriv.: Vé-ey, an island in Romsdal in Norway, Edda ii. 492; Óðins-vé = Odense in Funen in Denmark, Fms. xi. (never in Icel. local names): freq. in mod. Dan. and Swed. local names, Vi-um, Vi-bæí, Vi-lund, Vis-by.
    II. in names of persons, either from vé = aedes or from vé = Goth. weihs = holy, thus, e. g. Vé-laug may be = Heim-laug, which name also occurs: Vé-geirr (hann var kallaðr Végeirr því at hann var blótmaðr mikill), Landn. 149: Vé-gestr, Vé-dís, Vé-mundr (all these names in the same family), Landn.; as also, Vé-garðr, Vé-kell, Vé-brandr, Vé-freyðr, Vé-laug, Vé-leifr, Vé-ný, id.: or as in Véþ-ormr, Véþ-orn; cp. Widu-ric, Widu-kind, Wodu-rid, and other similar old Teut. pr. names.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > VÉ

  • 4 salón

    m.
    living room, saloon, hall, drawing room.
    * * *
    1 (en casa) sitting room, drawing room, lounge
    3 (exposición) show, exhibition
    \
    salón de actos assembly hall
    salón de baile ballroom
    salón de belleza beauty salon, beauty parlour (US parlor)
    salón de té tearoom, teashop
    salón naútico boat show
    * * *
    noun m.
    2) parlor, sitting-room
    * * *
    SM
    1) [de casa] living-room, lounge

    juego de salón — parlour game, parlor game (EEUU)

    2) [de lugar público] [gen] hall, assembly-room; [de colegio] common-room; (Com) show, trade fair, exhibition; (Náut) saloon; Chile (Ferro) first class

    salón de belleza — beauty parlour, beauty parlor (EEUU)

    salón de juegos — [en casino] gaming room; [en hotel, barco] casino

    salón de los pasos perdidos — * waiting room

    salón de masaje — massage parlour, massage parlor (EEUU)

    3) (=muebles) suite of living room furniture, lounge suite
    * * *
    a) ( en casa particular) living room, sitting room (BrE), lounge (BrE)
    b) ( en hotel) reception room, function room
    c) ( en palacio) hall
    d) ( de clases) classroom
    * * *
    = parlour [parlor, -USA], salon, saloon.
    Ex. This article focuses especially on cultural practices that encourage reading in social settings, including the school, Sunday school, public library, and domestic parlour.
    Ex. The author places computer conferencing in the long tradition of salons where people gathered to talk about current affairs and enjoy entertainment.
    Ex. Small opening windows provide fresh air from the sides of the roof, the ceiling fans sucking air into the clerestory and down to the saloon.
    ----
    * baile de salón = ballroom dance.
    * conspiración de salón = armchair conspiracy.
    * Entra en mi salón, dijo la araña... = Come into my parlour, said the spider....
    * juego de salón = parlour game.
    * juego de salón recreativo = arcade game.
    * salón comedor = dining room.
    * salón común = common room.
    * salón de baile = dance-hall, ballroom.
    * salón de belleza = beauty salon, beauty centre, beauty parlour, beauty shop.
    * salón de congresos = convention hall.
    * salón de convenciones = convention hall.
    * salón de estar = lounge.
    * salón de exposición y ventas = salesroom [saleroom].
    * salón de grados = conference room.
    * salón de juegos = children's gallery, video-game arcade, amusement arcade, games room.
    * salón de juegos recreativos = amusement arcade.
    * salón de lectura = browsing room.
    * salón de relax = massage parlour.
    * salón de televisión = TV lounge.
    * salón recreativo = video-game arcade.
    * salón social = community room, drop-in lounge, community hall.
    * salón unisex = unisex salon.
    * * *
    a) ( en casa particular) living room, sitting room (BrE), lounge (BrE)
    b) ( en hotel) reception room, function room
    c) ( en palacio) hall
    d) ( de clases) classroom
    * * *
    = parlour [parlor, -USA], salon, saloon.

    Ex: This article focuses especially on cultural practices that encourage reading in social settings, including the school, Sunday school, public library, and domestic parlour.

    Ex: The author places computer conferencing in the long tradition of salons where people gathered to talk about current affairs and enjoy entertainment.
    Ex: Small opening windows provide fresh air from the sides of the roof, the ceiling fans sucking air into the clerestory and down to the saloon.
    * baile de salón = ballroom dance.
    * conspiración de salón = armchair conspiracy.
    * Entra en mi salón, dijo la araña... = Come into my parlour, said the spider....
    * juego de salón = parlour game.
    * juego de salón recreativo = arcade game.
    * salón comedor = dining room.
    * salón común = common room.
    * salón de baile = dance-hall, ballroom.
    * salón de belleza = beauty salon, beauty centre, beauty parlour, beauty shop.
    * salón de congresos = convention hall.
    * salón de convenciones = convention hall.
    * salón de estar = lounge.
    * salón de exposición y ventas = salesroom [saleroom].
    * salón de grados = conference room.
    * salón de juegos = children's gallery, video-game arcade, amusement arcade, games room.
    * salón de juegos recreativos = amusement arcade.
    * salón de lectura = browsing room.
    * salón de relax = massage parlour.
    * salón de televisión = TV lounge.
    * salón recreativo = video-game arcade.
    * salón social = community room, drop-in lounge, community hall.
    * salón unisex = unisex salon.

    * * *
    1 (en una casa particular) parlor ( AmE), living room, sitting room ( BrE), lounge ( BrE)
    2 (en un hotel) reception room, function room
    un revolucionario de salón an armchair revolutionary
    Compuestos:
    living room-dining room
    auditorium ( AmE), assembly hall ( BrE)
    ballroom
    beauty salon, beauty parlor
    exhibition hall
    salesroom, saleroom ( BrE)
    ( AmL) function room, reception room
    (establecimiento) amusement arcade; (en un hotel, un barco) gaming room, games room
    motor show
    collectors' fair
    book fair
    tearoom, teashop
    literary group
    boat show
    amusement arcade
    * * *

     

    salón sustantivo masculino





    salón de baile ballroom;
    salón de belleza beauty salon, beauty parlor;
    salón de fiestas (AmL) function room, reception room;
    salón náutico/del automóvil boat/motor show
    salón sustantivo masculino
    1 (de una casa) lounge, living o sitting room
    2 (de un edificio para diversos usos) hall
    salón de actos, assembly hall, US auditorium
    salón de conferencias, conference room
    3 (establecimiento) salón de baile, ballroom, dance hall
    salón de belleza, beauty salon o parlour, US parlor
    salón de té, tearoom, teashop
    4 (exposición) exhibition
    salón del automóvil, motor show
    5 (de) salón (frívolo, insustancial) un político/ escritor/periodista de salón, a second rate politician/ writer/journalist
    ' salón' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    barrer
    - comer
    - haber
    - instituto
    - mueble
    - pared
    - pisada
    - presidir
    - atestado
    - confitería
    - fastuoso
    - peinar
    - peluquería
    English:
    amusement arcade
    - apartment
    - assembly
    - ballroom
    - ballroom dancing
    - beauty parlour
    - beauty salon
    - dance hall
    - dancing
    - drawing room
    - grand
    - living room
    - lounge
    - salon
    - show
    - teashop
    - wedding reception
    - ball
    - beauty
    - board
    - court
    - drawing
    - front
    - hall
    - motor
    - parlor
    - pump
    - sales
    - sitting
    - tea
    * * *
    salón nm
    1. [en vivienda] lounge, sitting room;
    revolucionario de salón armchair revolutionary;
    intelectual de salón armchair intellectual
    2. [para reuniones, ceremonias] hall
    salón de actos assembly hall, assembly room;
    salón de baile ballroom;
    RP salón de fiestas function room;
    salón de sesiones committee room
    3. [mobiliario] lounge suite
    4. [feria] show, exhibition
    salón del automóvil auto o Br motor show;
    5. [establecimiento] shop
    salón de belleza beauty parlour, beauty salon;
    salón de masaje massage parlour;
    salón recreativo game o Br amusement arcade;
    salón de té tearoom
    * * *
    m living room
    * * *
    salón nm, pl salones
    1) : hall, large room
    salón de clase: classroom
    salón de baile: ballroom
    2) : salon
    salón de belleza: beauty salon
    3) : parlor, sitting room
    * * *
    1. (en una casa) living room / lounge

    Spanish-English dictionary > salón

  • 5 lieu

    I.
    lieu1 (plural lieux) [ljø]
    1. masculine noun
       a. ( = endroit) place ; [d'événement] scene
    ► avoir lieu ( = se produire) to take place
    • vous appellerez le médecin, s'il y a lieu send for the doctor if necessary► tenir lieu de
    2. plural masculine noun
    lieux ( = locaux) premises
    II.
    lieu2 [ljø]
    masculine noun
    ( = poisson) lieu jaune pollack
    * * *
    ljø
    1.
    nom masculin
    1) (pl lieus) ( poisson)

    lieu (noir) — coley, black pollock

    2) (pl lieux) ( endroit) place

    lieu de rendez-vous or de rencontre — meeting place

    lieu d'habitation/de naissance — place of residence/of birth

    lieu de vente — retail outlet, point of sale

    en lieu et place de quelqu'un — [signer, agir] on behalf of somebody

    en premier lieu — in the first place, firstly

    tenir lieu de — to serve as [réfectoire, chambre]

    donner lieu à — to cause ou give rise to [scandale]; haut


    2.
    au lieu de locution prépositive instead of

    3.
    lieux nom masculin pluriel
    1) ( endroit) parts

    sur les lieux — [être] at the scene; [arriver] on the scene

    2) ( habitation) premises
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:
    * * *
    ljø lieux pl
    1. nm
    1) (= endroit) place

    La cérémonie a eu lieu dans la salle des fêtes. — The ceremony took place in the village hall.

    avoir lieu de faire — to have grounds for doing, to have good reason for doing

    il n'y a pas lieu de... — there's no need to...

    Il n'y pas lieu de s'inquiéter. — There's no need to worry.

    tenir lieu de (= agir en tant que) — to take the place of, (= servir de) to serve as

    donner lieu à — to give rise to, to give cause for

    J'aimerais une tarte aux pommes au lieu de la glace. — I'd like apple tart instead of ice cream.

    2. lieux nmpl
    1) (= locaux) premises

    vider les lieux; quitter les lieux — to leave the premises, [locataire] to vacate the premises

    2) [accident, crime] scene sg
    * * *
    A nm
    1 (pl lieus) ( poisson) lieu (noir) coley, black pollock;
    2 (pl lieux) ( endroit) place; un bon lieu de promenade a good place for walking; complément/adverbe de lieu adverbial/adverb of place; choisir le lieu de la cérémonie to choose where the ceremony will take place; mettre qch en lieu sûr to put sth in a safe place; lieu de rendez-vous or de rencontre meeting place; lieu d'habitation/de naissance place of residence/of birth; lieu de pèlerinage place of pilgrimage; lieu de culte place of worship; lieu de vente retail outlet, point of sale; sur le lieu de travail in the workplace; lieu de passage thoroughfare; lieu de l'action/du crime scene of the action/of the crime; sur le lieu du drame at the scene of the tragedy; lieu de tournage (film) set; en tous lieux everywhere; en lieu et place de qn [signer, agir] on behalf of sb; en premier lieu in the first place, firstly; en second lieu secondly; en dernier lieu lastly; avoir lieu to take place; tenir lieu de to serve as [réfectoire, chambre]; cette lettre tient lieu d'invitation this letter is an invitation; il y a lieu de s'inquiéter there is cause for anxiety; il n'y a pas lieu de s'affoler there is no cause for panic; s'il y a lieu if necessary; cela n'a pas lieu d'être it shouldn't be so; tes critiques n'ont pas lieu d'être there are no grounds for your criticisms; elle a lieu d'être contente she has cause to be happy; donner lieu à to cause ou give rise to [scandale]; ⇒ haut.
    B au lieu de loc prép instead of.
    C au lieu que loc conj rather than.
    D lieux nmpl
    1 ( endroit) parts; repérer les lieux to have a scout around; ( pour des raisons malhonnêtes) to stake out the place; sur les lieux [être] at the scene; [arriver] on the scene; notre envoyé spécial est déjà sur les lieux our special correspondent is already at the scene;
    2 ( habitation) premises; visiter/quitter les lieux to visit/leave the premises; le maître des lieux the master of the house.
    lieu commun commonplace; lieu géométrique† locus; lieu jaune yellow pollock; lieu de plaisir euph brothel; lieu public public place; lieu saint holy place; lieu scénique stage; lieux d'aisances† euph toilets.
    n'avoir ni or être sans feu ni lieu to have neither hearth nor home†.
    I
    ( pluriel lieus) [ljø] nom masculin
    II
    ( pluriel lieux) [ljø] nom masculin
    1. [endroit] place
    lieu de rassemblement place of assembly, assembly point
    lieu de naissance birthplace, place of birth
    lieu de pèlerinage place of ou centre for pilgrimage
    le haut lieu de... the Mecca of..., a Mecca for...
    adverbe/complément (circonstanciel) de lieu adverb/complement of place
    a. [entrevue, expérience, spectacle] to take place
    b. [accident] to happen
    c. [erreur] to occur
    s'il y a lieu if necessary, should the need arise
    donner lieu à [entraîner]: donner lieu à des désagréments to cause ou to give rise to trouble
    ————————
    lieux nom masculin pluriel
    1. [endroit précis] scene
    pour être efficace, il faut être sur les lieux 24 heures sur 24 if you want to do things properly, you have to be on the spot 24 hours a day
    2. [bâtiments] premises
    ————————
    au lieu de locution prépositionnelle
    elle aurait dû me remercier, au lieu de ça, elle m'en veut she should have thanked me, instead of which she bears a grudge against me
    ————————
    au lieu que locution conjonctive
    je préfère ranger moi-même mon bureau au lieu que tu viennes tout changer de place I prefer to tidy my desk myself rather than having you changing everything around
    ————————
    en dernier lieu locution adverbiale
    en haut lieu locution adverbiale
    en lieu et place de locution prépositionnelle
    ————————
    en lieu sûr locution adverbiale
    range-le en lieu sûr put it away in a safe place, put it away somewhere safe
    ————————
    en premier lieu locution adverbiale
    en tous lieux locution adverbiale
    ————————
    lieu commun nom masculin

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > lieu

  • 6 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 7 cambio

    m.
    1 change.
    se ha producido un cambio de situación the situation has changed, there has been a change in the situation
    a las primeras de cambio at the first opportunity
    cambio de domicilio change of address
    cambio horario = putting clocks back or forward one hour (bianual)
    cambio de gobierno change of government
    2 exchange (intercambio).
    a cambio (de) in exchange o return (for)
    no pido nada a cambio I'm not asking for anything back o in return
    3 change (monedas).
    nos hemos quedado sin cambio(s) we're out of change
    ¿tiene cambio de cinco mil? have you got change of o for five thousand?
    quédese con el cambio keep the change
    5 substitution, change (sport) (sustitución).
    hacer un cambio to make a substitution o change
    pres.indicat.
    1st person singular (yo) present indicative of spanish verb: cambiar.
    * * *
    1 change, changing
    2 (intercambio) exchange, exchanging
    3 (dinero suelto) change, loose change; (vuelta) change
    ■ ¿me puedes dar cambio de cien euros? can you change a hundred euros?
    4 (acciones) price, quotation; (divisas) exchange rate
    5 (tren) switch
    6 AUTOMÓVIL gear change
    \
    a cambio de in exchange for
    a las primeras de cambio figurado at the first opportunity
    en cambio on the other hand, but, whereas
    ■ tú no puedes cantar, en cambio él sí you can't sing, but he can
    cambio automático AUTOMÓVIL automatic transmission
    cambio de la guardia changing of the guard
    cambio de marchas (acción) gear change 2 (caja) gearbox
    cambio de planes change of plans
    casa de cambio bureau de change
    libre cambio free trade
    * * *
    noun m.
    3) exchange, swap
    •
    - en cambio
    * * *
    SM
    1) (=variación) change

    • necesito un cambio de aires — I need a change of scene

    • siempre nos veíamos durante el cambio de clase — we always used to meet in the break between classes

    • un cambio para mejor/peor — a change for the better/worse

    cambio de agujas — (Ferro) points junction, switch junction (EEUU)

    cambio de gobierno — [completo] change of government; [parcial] reshuffle

    cambio de línea — (Inform) line feed

    cambio de marchas — (=acción) gear change; (=mecanismo) gear stick, gearshift (EEUU)

    cambio de opinión — change of opinion, turn in opinion

    cambio de página — (Inform) form feed

    cambio de rasante, prohibido adelantar en un cambio de rasante — no overtaking on the brow of a hill

    cambio de tercio — (Taur) change of stage ( in a bullfight)

    cambio de velocidades — = cambio de marchas

    cambio de vía — (Ferro) points pl, switches pl (EEUU)

    2) (=intercambio) exchange, swap *

    hicimos un cambio de coche — we exchanged cars, we swapped cars *

    3) (Econ)
    a) (=dinero suelto) change

    ¿tienes cambio de 50 euros? — do you have change for 50 euros?, can you change 50 euros?

    b) [de moneda extranjera] (=tipo) exchange rate

    Cambio — Bureau de Change, Change

    4)

    • a cambio — in return, in exchange

    "admitimos su coche usado a cambio" — "cars taken in part exchange", "trade-ins accepted"

    • a cambio de — in return for, in exchange for

    reclamaba dinero a cambio de su silencio — he demanded money in return o exchange for keeping quiet (about it)

    5)

    • en cambio — whereas

    yo nunca llego a tiempo, en cambio ella es muy puntual — I never arrive on time, whereas she is very punctual

    ¿pero qué ha sucedido en cambio? — but instead, what has happened?

    * * *
    1)
    a) (alteración, modificación) change

    cambio de algo — <de planes/domicilio> change of something

    un cambio de aires or ambiente — a change of scene

    a la primera de cambio — (fam) at the first opportunity

    b) (Auto) gearshift (AmE), gear change (BrE)

    meta el cambio — (AmL) put it in gear

    un coche con cinco cambios — (AmL) a car with a five-speed gearbox

    2)
    a) ( canje) exchange

    a cambio (de) — in exchange (for), in return (for)

    en cambio: a él le gusta a mí en cambio no he likes it but I don't; el autobús es agotador, en cambio el tren es muy agradable — the bus is exhausting; the train however o on the other hand is very pleasant

    3)
    a) (Fin) ( de moneda extranjera) exchange

    ¿a cómo está el cambio? — what's the exchange rate?

    cambio — bureau de change, change

    al cambio del día — at the current exchange rate; libre I 1)

    b) ( diferencia) change
    c) ( dinero suelto) change

    ¿tienes cambio de mil? — can you change a thousand pesetas?

    * * *
    1)
    a) (alteración, modificación) change

    cambio de algo — <de planes/domicilio> change of something

    un cambio de aires or ambiente — a change of scene

    a la primera de cambio — (fam) at the first opportunity

    b) (Auto) gearshift (AmE), gear change (BrE)

    meta el cambio — (AmL) put it in gear

    un coche con cinco cambios — (AmL) a car with a five-speed gearbox

    2)
    a) ( canje) exchange

    a cambio (de) — in exchange (for), in return (for)

    en cambio: a él le gusta a mí en cambio no he likes it but I don't; el autobús es agotador, en cambio el tren es muy agradable — the bus is exhausting; the train however o on the other hand is very pleasant

    3)
    a) (Fin) ( de moneda extranjera) exchange

    ¿a cómo está el cambio? — what's the exchange rate?

    cambio — bureau de change, change

    al cambio del día — at the current exchange rate; libre I 1)

    b) ( diferencia) change
    c) ( dinero suelto) change

    ¿tienes cambio de mil? — can you change a thousand pesetas?

    * * *
    cambio1
    1 = adaptive response, alteration, change, editing, modulation, move, recasting, redesign, rotation, shift, transfer, transformation, changeover [change-over], disturbance, mutation, permeability, reformation, switchover, reverse, shift away from, shifting, changing of the guard, swing, bartering, switch, switching, change.

    Ex: It is too early to assess the success of the adaptive responses which have been instituted in most SLIS.

    Ex: A musical adaptation is a musical work that represents a distinct alteration of another work (e.g. a free transcription), a work that paraphrases parts of various works or the general style of another composer, or a work that is merely based on other music (e.g. variations on a them).
    Ex: These changes have meant modifications, some very time-consuming, to serials catalogues in libraries.
    Ex: To ensure further that all the index entries generated by chain procedure are indeed helpful, the initial analysis of the chain may require editing.
    Ex: There is little modulation, whole steps of division being short-circuited and an odd assembly of terms being frequently found: e.g.: LAW see also JURY, JUDGES.
    Ex: Better flexibility is achieved if the heating, ventilation and lighting can accommodate this move without the need for any alterations.
    Ex: This kind of large-scale recasting offers an opportunity for the scheme to go forward rather than stagnate until it is completely taken by events.
    Ex: This action was the redesign of the enquiry form in order to elicit more information from the enquirer.
    Ex: The entries that result from the rotation mechanism have standard layout, punctuation and typography, all of which have been pre-programmed.
    Ex: Transitory circumstances of daily life are what cause these shifts.
    Ex: When the record transfer is complete, the catalog summary screen is shown for the new record so that the user can review and update it.
    Ex: Hungary faces far-reaching socio-economic transformation which will inevitably affect libraries as well.
    Ex: The changeover has resulted in more rapid machine-editing of input and reduced costs for cataloguing.
    Ex: A centralised system was chosen to ensure speedy receipt and dissemination with minimal disturbances.
    Ex: The very meanings of words like 'library' and 'university' are about to undergo mutations too radical to conceive, much less predict = Los significados mismos de palabras como "biblioteca" y "universidad" están a punto de experimentar cambios demasiado radicales de concevir y cuanto mucho menos de predecir.
    Ex: There is greater permeability than before between different types of library at the start of a career but, once settled in a post, fewer librarians than before change from one type of library to another.
    Ex: The author presents suggestions for the reformation of medical library education.
    Ex: The transition date for the switchover is 1 Oct 2000.
    Ex: Moreover, we conclude that the process of placing a feminist stamp on working relations is both far from complete and subject to reverses.
    Ex: This article discusses the effects of changes in the economy on the distribution of work in libraries which indicate a shift away from its female origins.
    Ex: This article considers the use of a spreadsheet in the shifting of periodicals collections in order to save time.
    Ex: The recent reorganization has resulted in a merger of the academic and public divisions and a changing of the guard among the company's top officials.
    Ex: The addition of new feedback techniques produced a significant swing in favour of the application.
    Ex: Holdings will become increasingly important as a bartering tool to gain additional access benefits.
    Ex: Office automation have brought about a switch to a paperless office.
    Ex: These 'spuriously loyal' customers are not willing to churn just because of switching costs.
    Ex: Most libraries maintain a small cash float for the giving of change and, in addition, money/ is received in payment of fines.
    * a cambio = in return.
    * a cambio de = in exchange for, in return for.
    * a cambio de nada = for nothing.
    * aceptar el cambio = embrace + change.
    * aceptar un cambio = accommodate + change.
    * adaptarse al cambio = accommodate to + change, adapt to + change.
    * adaptarse a los cambios = flow with + the tides.
    * adoptar un cambio = adopt + change, accommodate + change.
    * agente de cambio = agent of(for) change, force for change, force of change.
    * agente del cambio = change agent.
    * aires de cambio = wind(s) of change, the, seas of change, the.
    * cambio a = flight to.
    * cambio brusco = revulsion, flip-flop.
    * cambio brusco de velocidad del viento = wind shear.
    * cambio climático = climate change, climatic change.
    * cambio cualitativo = step change, qualitative change.
    * cambio cuantitativo = quantitative change.
    * cambio cultural = cultural change.
    * cambio de actitud = change in attitude, change of heart.
    * cambio de aires = change of scenery, change of air and scene, change of air, change of scene, greener pastures, pastures new.
    * cambio de ambiente = change of scenery, change of air and scene, change of air, change of scene.
    * cambio de aspecto = lick of paint.
    * cambio de ciudadanía = change of citizenship.
    * cambio de dirección = change of hands.
    * cambio de dueño = change of hands.
    * cambio de énfasis = shift of emphasis, shift in emphasis.
    * cambio de entorno = change of scenery, change of air and scene, change of air, change of scene.
    * cambio de hora estacional = daylight saving time.
    * cambio de idea = change of heart, change of mind.
    * cambio de imagen = makeover [make-over], makeover [make-over].
    * cambio de instalación eléctrica = rewiring.
    * cambio de la guardia = changing of the guard.
    * cambio de look = lick of paint.
    * cambio de lugar = relocation.
    * cambio de manos = change of hands.
    * cambio de mirada = gaze-shift.
    * cambio demográfico = population trend.
    * cambio de nacionalidad = change of citizenship.
    * cambio de nombre = rebranding.
    * cambio de opinión = change of heart, change of mind.
    * cambio de orientación = paradigm change, paradigm shift.
    * cambio de paradigma = paradigm change, paradigm shift.
    * cambio de parecer = change of heart, change of mind.
    * cambio de procedimiento = procedural change.
    * cambio de propietario = change of hands.
    * cambio de proveedor = churn.
    * cambio de registro = code switching.
    * cambio de residencia = resettlement.
    * cambio de servicio = churn.
    * cambio de sexo = sex change.
    * cambio de título = title change.
    * cambio escénico = scene changing.
    * cambio estacional = seasonal change.
    * cambio hormonal = hormonal change.
    * cambio inesperado = twist.
    * cambio institucional = institutional change.
    * cambio metereológico = weather modification.
    * cambio + ocurrir = change + take place.
    * cambio + producirse = change + come about.
    * cambio profundo = profound change.
    * cambio radical = revulsion, sea change, radical change.
    * cambio radical de postura = about-face.
    * cambio revolucionario = revolutionary change.
    * cambios = second thoughts, ebb and flow.
    * cambio social = social change, societal change.
    * cambio + suceder = change + take place.
    * cambio + tener lugar = change + take place.
    * cambio total = turnabout [turn-about], turnaround.
    * cambio transformador = transformative change, transforming change.
    * cambio traumático = traumatic change.
    * cambio vertiginoso = spiral of change.
    * clima de cambio = climate of change.
    * efectuar cambios = wreak + changes.
    * efectuar un cambio = effect + change.
    * elemento de cambio = agent of(for) change.
    * en cambio = by contrast, in contrast, instead, shifting, by comparison.
    * en constante cambio = ever-changing [ever changing], ever-fluid, on the move, fast changing [fast-changing], ever-shifting.
    * en continuo cambio = constantly shifting, ever-changing [ever changing], ever-shifting.
    * en estado de cambio = in a state of flux.
    * enfrentarse a los cambios = cope with + change.
    * en proceso de cambio = changing.
    * estado de cambio = state of flux.
    * estar en estado de cambio = be in flux.
    * estar en proceso de cambio = be in flux.
    * estar sujeto a cambios = be written in sand, not stone, be subject to change.
    * experimentar un cambio = bring about + change, undergo + modification, undergo + change, undergo + transition.
    * experimentar un cambio + Adjetivo = take + a + Adjetivo + turn.
    * hacer cambios en la búsqueda = renegotiate + search.
    * hacer cambios indebidamente = tamper (with).
    * hacer el cambio = make + the change.
    * hacer frente al cambio = manage + change.
    * hacer frente a un cambio = meet + change.
    * hacer un cambio = make + change.
    * impulsor del cambio = driver of change.
    * introducir un cambio = bring + change.
    * libre cambio = laissez-faire.
    * línea internacional de cambio de fecha, la = International Date Line, the.
    * lograr un cambio = accomplish + change.
    * los constantes cambios de = the changing face of, the changing nature of.
    * momento clave del cambio = tipping point.
    * moneda de cambio = bargaining chip.
    * mostrar por medio de cambio de intensidad en el brillo = flash up.
    * motor del cambio = driver of change.
    * no hacer ningún cambio = stand + pat.
    * no sufrir cambios = remain + normal.
    * ocasionar un cambio = bring about + change, trigger + change.
    * operación de cambio de sexo = sex-change surgery, sex-change operation.
    * permanecer sin cambios = remain + unchanged.
    * proceso de cambio = process of change.
    * producir un cambio = effect + change, produce + change, trigger + change.
    * provocar cambios = wreak + changes.
    * provocar un cambio = bring about + change.
    * reacio al cambio = resistant to change.
    * realizar un cambio = make + alteration, implement + change.
    * repercusiones del cambio = impact of change.
    * resistente al cambio = resistant to change.
    * ritmo del cambio = rate of change, pace of change.
    * ser susceptible de cambios = be subject to change.
    * sin cambio = inviolate.
    * sin cambios = monotone, stable, undisturbed, unchanged, unmodified, unaltered, unedited.
    * subsidio para cambio de residencia = resettlement allowance.
    * suceder un cambio = occur + change.
    * sucesión de cambios bruscos = roller coaster ride, roller coaster.
    * sufrir un cambio = experience + change, undergo + change.
    * suponer un cambio = bring about + change.
    * trabajar a cambio de nada = work for + nothing.

    cambio2

    Ex: Forget climate change, voters want more loose change.

    * bolsa de cambio = stock exchange.
    * cambio de divisas = currency rate, currency exchange.
    * cambio de moneda = exchange rate, foreign exchange, currency exchange rate, market rate of exchange, foreign exchange rate, currency rate, rate of exchange, currency exchange.
    * letra de cambio = bill of exchange.
    * oficina de cambio = exchange office, currency exchange bureau, exchange bureau.
    * tipo de cambio = exchange rate, rate of exchange.
    * variación de los tipos de cambio = exchange rate change.

    cambio3
    3 = gear, derailleur.

    Ex: Their products were charming and much less expensive than American clockwork toys because they used tinplate gears rather than brass.

    Ex: There is a front and a rear derailleur on most modern bikes.
    * palanca de cambio = shifter.

    * * *
    A
    1 (alteración, modificación) change
    el cambio que ha tenido lugar en él the change he has undergone
    cambio DE algo:
    un brusco cambio de temperatura a sudden change in temperature
    lo que tú necesitas es un cambio de aires or ambiente what you need is a change of scene
    ha habido un cambio de planes there's been a change of plan
    una operación de cambio de sexo a sex-change operation
    a la primera de cambio ( fam); at the first opportunity, the first thing you know ( colloq)
    2 ( Auto) gearshift ( AmE), gear change ( BrE)
    hacer un cambio to change gear
    meta el cambio ( AmL); put it in gear
    un coche con cinco cambios ( AmL); a car with a five-speed gearbox
    Compuestos:
    climate change
    change of address
    scene change
    change of guard, changing of the guard
    audible
    (dispositivo) transmission ( AmE), gearbox ( BrE); (acción) gearshift ( AmE), gear change ( BrE)
    automatic gearshift ( AmE) o ( BrE) gearbox
    manual gearshift ( AmE) o ( BrE) gearbox
    brow of a hill
    audible
    ( Auto) junction
    switch ( AmE), points (pl) ( BrE)
    B
    1 (canje) exchange
    creo que has salido perdiendo con el cambio I think you've lost out in the deal
    [ S ] no se admiten cambios ni devoluciones goods cannot be exchanged or returned
    2 ( en locs):
    a cambio in exchange, in return
    a cambio de in exchange for, in return for
    estoy dispuesto a hacerlo a cambio de un pequeño favor I'm prepared to do it in exchange o in return for a small favor
    daría cualquier cosa a cambio de un poco de paz I'd do anything for a bit of peace
    en cambio: a él le parece espléndido; a mí, en cambio, no me gusta he thinks it's wonderful, but personally I don't like it
    el viaje en autobús es agotador, en cambio irse en tren es muy agradable the bus journey is exhausting whereas o but if you go by train it's very pleasant, the bus journey is exhausting; if you go by train, however o on the other hand, it is very pleasant
    C
    cambio de divisas foreign exchange
    ¿a cómo está el cambio? what's the exchange rate?
    [ S ] cambio bureau de change, change
    al cambio del día at the current exchange rate
    libre1 (↑ libre (1))
    2 (diferencia) change
    quédese con el cambio keep the change
    me ha dado mal el cambio he's given me the wrong change
    ¿tienes cambio de diez? can you change ten euros?
    necesito cambio para el teléfono I need some change for the telephone
    Compuestos:
    daily exchange rate o rate of exchange
    foreign exchange
    * * *

     

    Del verbo cambiar: ( conjugate cambiar)

    cambio es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) presente indicativo

    cambió es:

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) pretérito indicativo

    Multiple Entries:
    cambiar    
    cambio
    cambiar ( conjugate cambiar) verbo transitivo
    1
    a) (alterar, modificar) ‹horario/imagen/persona› to change

    b) (de lugar, posición):


    cambié las flores de florero I put the flowers in a different vase
    c) ( reemplazar) ‹pieza/fecha/sábanas› to change;


    cambiole el nombre a algo to change the name of sth
    d) ‹niño/bebé› to change

    e) (Fin) to change;

    cambié 100 libras a or (Esp) en dólares I changed 100 pounds into dollars
    2 ( canjear) ‹sellos/estampas› to swap, to trade (esp AmE);
    cambio algo por algo ‹sellos/estampas› to swap o (esp AmE) trade sth for sth;
    ‹ compra› to exchange o change sth for sth;
    ◊ ¿quieres que te cambie el lugar? do you want me to swap o change places with you?

    verbo intransitivo
    a) [ciudad/persona] to change;


    le está cambiando la voz his voice is breaking
    b) (Auto) to change gear


    ◊ cambio de avión/tren to change planes/train

    d) cambio de algo ‹de tema/canal/color› to change sth;


    cambio de sentido to make (AmE) o (BrE) do a U-turn
    cambiarse verbo pronominal

    b) ( refl) ‹camisa/nombre/peinado› to change;

    cambiose de algo ‹de camisa/zapatos› to change sth;

    cambiose de casa to move house;
    cámbiate de camisa change your shirt
    c) cambiose por algn to change places with sb

    d) ( recípr) ‹sellos/estampas› to swap, to trade (esp AmE)


    cambio sustantivo masculino
    1

    cambio de algo ‹de planes/domicilio› change of sth;
    un cambio de aire(s) or ambiente a change of scene
    b) (Auto) gearshift (AmE), gear change (BrE);


    cambio de sentido U-turn
    2

    ( on signs) no se admiten cambios goods cannot be exchanged
    b) ( en locs)


    en cambio: el viaje en autobús es agotador, en cambio en tren es muy agradable the bus journey is exhausting;

    by train however o on the other hand is very pleasant
    3


    ¿a cómo está el cambio? what's the exchange rate?;

    ( on signs) cambio bureau de change, change



    cambiar
    I verbo transitivo
    1 to change
    2 (cromos, etc) to swap, (en un comercio) exchange
    3 (un tipo de moneda por otro) to change
    II verbo intransitivo to change
    cambiar de casa, to move (house)
    cambiar de idea, to change one's mind
    cambiar de sitio, to move
    cambiar de trabajo, to get another job
    cambiar de velocidad, to change gear
    cambio sustantivo masculino
    1 change
    (de opinión) shift
    un cambio de impresiones, an exchange of opinions
    2 (del dinero) change: ¿tienes cambio de cinco mil?, have you got change for five thousand?
    3 Fin (de la moneda extranjera) exchange
    (de unas acciones) price
    4 Auto gear change
    cambio automático, automatic transmission
    cambio de rasante, brow of a hill
    ♦ Locuciones: a cambio de, in exchange for
    a las primeras de cambio, at the firsl opportunity
    en cambio, on the other hand: él es muy engreído, en cambio ella es muy dulce, he's really conceited; on the other hand she is very sweet
    ' cambio' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    abrupta
    - abrupto
    - aguantar
    - aire
    - alteración
    - apreciarse
    - benéfica
    - benéfico
    - biombo
    - brutal
    - desplazamiento
    - experimentar
    - girar
    - imponerse
    - inflexión
    - letra
    - oscilación
    - por
    - primera
    - primero
    - radical
    - semblante
    - sensible
    - tipo
    - vaivén
    - viraje
    - vuelta
    - acelerar
    - acentuado
    - apreciable
    - apresurar
    - brusco
    - cambiar
    - cara
    - cerrado
    - efectuar
    - feria
    - guardia
    - idea
    - importante
    - inevitable
    - lado
    - libre
    - nuevo
    - observar
    - operar
    - opinión
    - producir
    - quedar
    - rápido
    English:
    abrupt
    - adjustment
    - alarmed
    - alteration
    - bare
    - better
    - change
    - chapter
    - conversely
    - department
    - displacement
    - distinct
    - draft
    - dramatic
    - dramatically
    - drastic
    - euro
    - exchange
    - exchange rate
    - fall
    - float
    - gearshift
    - gearstick
    - instead
    - intend
    - into
    - likely
    - major
    - make
    - modification
    - occur
    - protection money
    - rate
    - refreshing
    - refreshingly
    - return
    - reversal
    - round
    - sex change
    - shift
    - short-change
    - slight
    - small change
    - subject
    - substantial
    - sudden
    - swap for
    - sweep
    - sweeping
    - swing
    * * *
    ♦ nm
    1. [alteración, modificación] change;
    vivimos una época de grandes cambios we live in times of great change;
    cambio de actitud change in attitude;
    cambio de gobierno change of government;
    cambio radical turnabout, turnround;
    cambio de tiempo change in the weather;
    ha ganado con el cambio de trabajo he has benefited from changing jobs;
    con el cambio de política hemos perdido todos we have all lost out as a result of the change in policy;
    se ha producido un cambio de situación the situation has changed, there has been a change in the situation;
    el cambio al sistema métrico ha sido muy sencillo the changeover to the metric system has been very straightforward;
    tu hijo ha pegado un cambio tremendo your son has really changed;
    a las primeras de cambio at the first opportunity;
    abandonó la carrera a las primeras de cambio she dropped out of the race almost as soon as it had started o shortly after it had started;
    cayeron eliminados a las primeras de cambio they fell at the first hurdle
    cambio climático climate change; Ling cambio de código code switching;
    cambio de domicilio change of address;
    cambio de escena Teatro scene change;
    Fig change of scene;
    cambio generacional: [m5] el partido necesita un cambio generacional urgente the party is in urgent need of a new generation of leaders;
    este joven pintor es un ejemplo del cambio generacional en marcha this young man is one of the new generation of painters who are coming to dominate the artistic scene;
    cambio de guardia [ceremonia] changing of the guard;
    cambio horario [bianual] = putting clocks back or forward one hour;
    cambio hormonal hormonal change;
    cambio de imagen image change;
    el cambio de milenio the end of the millennium;
    cambio de rasante brow of a hill;
    cambio de sexo sex change;
    Der cambio de tribunal change of venue; Ferroc cambio de vía Br points, US switch
    2. [reemplazo, trueque] exchange;
    (oficina de) cambio [en letrero] Br bureau de change, US foreign-exchange bureau;
    durante las rebajas no se admiten cambios while the sales are on, goods may not be exchanged;
    a cambio (de) in exchange o return (for);
    no pido nada a cambio I'm not asking for anything back o in return;
    se admite su vieja lavadora a cambio we will take your old washing machine in part exchange;
    te dejo el coche a cambio de que lo laves I'll let you use my car if you wash it for me
    Aut cambio de aceite oil change;
    cambio de impresiones exchange of views;
    Quím cambio iónico ion exchange;
    cambio de papeles role reversal
    3. [monedas, billetes] change;
    ¿tiene cambio? have you got any change?;
    ¿tiene cambio de 5.000? have you got change for o Br of 5,000?;
    nos hemos quedado sin cambio(s) we're out of change;
    quédese con el cambio keep the change;
    me ha dado el cambio incorrecto she gave me the wrong change
    4. Fin [de acciones] price;
    [de divisas] exchange rate;
    ha bajado el cambio del peso the (exchange rate of the) peso has fallen;
    los valores eléctricos han mantenido el cambio share prices in the electricity companies have remained steady;
    ¿a cuánto está el cambio de la libra? what's the exchange rate for the pound?
    cambio base base rate;
    cambio extranjero foreign exchange;
    cambio medio average exchange rate;
    cambio oficial official exchange rate
    5. Aut
    el cambio es muy duro the gears are rather stiff
    cambio automático automatic transmission;
    cambio de marchas [acción] gear change;
    [palanca] Br gear stick, US gear shift;
    cambio sincronizado [en bicicleta] indexed gear;
    cambio de velocidades [acción] gear change;
    [palanca] Br gear stick, US gear shift
    6. Dep [sustitución] substitution, change;
    hacer un cambio to make a substitution o change;
    el equipo visitante ha pedido (hacer un) cambio the away team want to make a substitution o change;
    el jugador lesionado pidió el cambio al entrenador the injured player signalled to the manager that he wanted to come off
    ♦ interj
    Rad
    ¡cambio (y corto)! over!;
    ¡cambio y cierro! over and out!
    ♦ en cambio loc adv
    [por otra parte] on the other hand, however; [en su lugar] instead;
    ellos no pueden ayudarnos, en cambio tú sí they can't help us, but o whereas you can;
    éste me gusta, en cambio este otro es feo I like this one, but this other one is horrible
    * * *
    m
    1 change;
    cambio de domicilio change of address;
    cambio de aires change of scene;
    cambio de turno change of shift;
    cambio de aceite AUTO oil change;
    ¡cambio! al hablar por radio over!
    2 COM exchange rate;
    el cambio del día the day’s (exchange) rate;
    libre cambio COM free trade
    3 ( suelto)
    :
    ¿tiene cambio? do you have change?
    4
    :
    no se admiten cambios goods will not be exchanged
    :
    a cambio de in exchange for;
    en cambio on the other hand
    * * *
    cambio nm
    1) : change, alteration
    2) : exchange
    3) : change (money)
    4)
    en cambio : instead
    5)
    en cambio : however, on the other hand
    * * *
    1. (en general) change
    ¿tienes cambio? have you got any change?
    2. (divisas) exchange rate

    Spanish-English dictionary > cambio

  • 8 AT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    1.
    and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.
    Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.
    WITH DAT.
    A. LOC.
    I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:
    1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.
    2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.
    3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)
    4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.
    5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.
    β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.
    6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.
    β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.
    γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.
    7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.
    β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.
    8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.
    β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.
    II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.
    2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.
    3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:
    α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.
    β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.
    γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.
    4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.
    5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.
    6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.
    β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.
    γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.
    7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.
    B. TEMP.
    I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.
    II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.
    β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.
    III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:
    1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,
    2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.
    IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:
    1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.
    2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.
    3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.
    V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.
    2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.
    C. METAPH. and in various cases:
    I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:
    α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.
    β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.
    II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.
    2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.
    III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.
    IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.
    2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)
    3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.
    4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.
    5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.
    6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.
    β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.
    V. denoting the source of a thing:
    1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.
    2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.
    VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.
    VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.
    VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.
    β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.
    IX. following many words:
    1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.
    β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …
    γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.
    δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.
    2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.
    3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.
    WITH ACC.
    TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.
    ☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.
    2.
    and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.
    I. it is used either,
    1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,
    2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.
    β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).
    3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.
    II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:
    α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.
    β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.
    γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.
    δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.
    ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.
    ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.
    η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.
    θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.
    3.
    and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.
    I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.
    II. it is used,
    1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.
    2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.
    β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.
    γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.
    III. used in connection with conjunctions,
    1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.
    α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.
    β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.
    γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.
    2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.
    IV. as a relat. conj.:
    1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.
    2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.
    V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.
    4.
    and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.
    5.
    n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.
    β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.
    6.
    the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT

  • 9 место мест·о

    завоевать себе место под солнцем — to win / to attain a place in the sun

    занимать место (в обществе и т.п.) — to rank

    2) (депутатское, члена парламента и т.п.; кресло в зале) seat

    добиться места, получить место (в парламенте и т.п.) — to gain / to win a seat

    занять своё место (на конференции, в парламенте и т.п.) — to take one's seat

    сохранить место (в парламенте и т.п.) — to hold a seat

    пожалуйста, оставайтесь на своих местах — please, remain seated

    почётное место — place / seat of honour

    места (членов парламента) в зале заседаний — floor

    места для почётных гостей (в парламенте, сенате и т.п.) — distinguished strangers' gallery

    место, занимаемое / предоставляемое в Генеральной Ассамблее (ООН) — seating in the General Assembly

    распределение мест (в комитете и т.п.) — allocation of seats

    3) (положение) position, place
    4) (должность) post, place, work

    Russian-english dctionary of diplomacy > место мест·о

  • 10 मध्य _madhya

    मध्य a. [मन्-यत् नस्य धः Tv.]
    1 Middle, central, being in the middle or centre; एकं मुक्तागुणमिव भुवः स्थूल- मध्येन्द्रनीलम् Me.48; Ms.2.21.
    -2 Intervening, inter- mediate.
    -3 Middling, moderate, of a middling size or quality, mediocre; अग्ऱ्यो मध्यो जघन्यश्च तं प्रवेक्ष्याम्यशेषतः Ms.12.3; प्रारभ्य विघ्नविहता विरमन्ति मध्याः Bh.2.27.
    -4 Neutral, impartial.
    -5 Just, right.
    -6 Mean (in astr.).
    -ध्यः, -ध्यम् 1 The middle, centre, middle or central part; अह्नः मध्यम् midday; सहस्रदीधितिरलंकरोति मध्यमह्नः Māl.
    1 'the sun is on the meridian' or 'right over-head'; सरति सहसा बाह्वोर्मध्यं गताप्यबला सती M.4.11 (v. l.); व्योममध्ये V.2.1.
    -2 The middle of the body, the waist; मध्ये क्षामा Me.84; वेदिविलग्नमध्या Ku.1.39; विशाल- वक्षास्तनुवृत्तमध्यः R.6.32; दधाना बलिभं मध्यं कर्णजाहविलोचना Bk.4.16.
    -3 The belly, abdomen; मध्येन... वलित्रयं चारु बभार बाला Ku.1.39.
    -4 The inside or interior of anything.
    -5 A middle state or condition.
    -6 The flank of a horse.
    -7 Mean time in music.
    -8 The middle term of a progression.
    -9 Cessation, pause, interval.
    -ध्या 1 The middle finger.
    -2 A young woman, one arrived at puberty.
    -ध्यम् Ten thousand billions. [The acc., instr., abl. and loc. singulars of मध्य are used adverbially. (a) मध्यम् into the midst of, into. (b) मध्येन through or between. (c) मध्यात् out of, from among, from the midst (with gen.); तेषां मध्यात् काकः प्रोवाच Pt.1. (d) मध्ये
    1 in the middle, between, among, in the midst; स जहार तयोर्मध्ये मैथिलीं लोकशोषणः R.12.29.
    -2 in, into, within, inside, oft. as the first member of adverbial compounds; e. g. मध्येगङ्गम् into the Ganges; मध्येजठरम् in the belly; Bv.1.61; मध्येनगरम् inside the city; मध्येनदि in the middle of the river; मध्येपृष्ठम् on the back; मध्येभक्तम् a medicine taken in the middle of one's meals; मध्येरणम् in the battle; Bv.1.128; मध्ये- सभम् in or before an assembly; N.6.76; मध्येसमुद्रम् in the midst of the sea; Śi.3.33.].
    -Comp. -अङ्गुलिः, -ला f. the middle finger.
    -अह्नः (for अहन्) midday, noon; प्रातःकालो मुहूर्तांस्त्रीन् संगवस्तावदेव तु । मध्याह्नस्त्रिमुहूर्तं स्यात्...... Dakṣasamhitā. ˚कृत्यम्, ˚क्रिया a midday rite or observance. ˚कालः, ˚वेला, ˚समयः noontime, midday. ˚स्नानम् midday ablution.
    -आदित्यः the mid-day sun.
    -उदात्त a. having the उदात्त accent on the middle syllable.
    -कर्णः a radius.
    -क्ष्मामा N. of a metre.
    -ग a. being or going in the middle or among.
    -गत a. central, middle, being in the middle.
    -गन्धः the mango tree.
    -ग्रहणम् the middle of an eclipse.
    -छाया mean or middle shadow.
    -जिह्वम् the organ of the palatals.
    -ज्या the sign of the meridian.
    -तमस् n. circular or annular darkness, central darkness.
    -तापिनी N. of an Upaniṣad.
    -दन्तः a front tooth.
    -दिनम् (also मध्यंदिनम्); मध्यंदिने$र्धरात्रे च Ms.7.151.
    1 midday, noon.
    -2 a midday offering.
    -दीपकम् a variety of the figure called Dīpaka, in which the common attribute that throws light on the whole description is placed in the middle; e. g; गरुडानिलतिग्मरश्मयः पततां यद्यपि संमता जवे । अचिरेण कृतार्थमागतं तममन्यन्त तथाप्यतीव ते ॥ Bk.1.25.
    -देशः 1 the middle region or space, the middle part of anything.
    -2 the waist.
    -3 the belly.
    -4 the meridian.
    -5 the central region, the country lying between the Himālaya and Vindhya mountains; हिमवद्विन्ध्ययोर्मध्यं यत्प्राग्विनशनादपि । प्रत्यगेव प्रयागाच्च मध्यदेशः स कीर्तितः ॥ Ms.2.21.
    -देहः the trunk of the body, the belly.
    -निहित a. inserted, fixed into.
    -पदम् the middle word. ˚लेपिन् see मध्यमपदलोपिन्.
    -परिमाणम् the middle measure (between an atom and infinitude).
    -पातः 1 communion, intercourse.
    -2 (in astr.) the mean occurrence of the aspect.
    -प्रविष्ट a. one who has stolen into another's confidence; Ks.
    -भः (in astr.) the meridian ecliptic point.
    -भागः 1 the middle part.
    -2 the waist.
    -भावः 1 middle state, mediocrity.
    -2 a middling or moderate distance.
    -मणिः the principle or central gem of a necklace.
    -यवः a weight of six white mustard-seeds.
    -योगिन् a. being in the middle of a conjunction, completely obscured.
    -रात्रः, -रात्रिः f. midnight.
    -रेखा the central or first meridian; (the line supposed to be drawn through लङ्का, उज्जयिनी, कुरुक्षेत्र and other places to the mount मेरु).
    -लग्नम् the point of the ecliptic situated on the meridian.
    -लोकः the middle of the three worlds; i. e. the earth or world of mortals. ˚ईशः, ˚ईश्वरः a king.
    -वयस् a. middle-aged.
    -वर्तिन् a.
    1 middle, central.
    -2 being among or in the middle. (-m.) an arbitrator, a mediator.
    -वृत्तम् the navel.
    -शरीर a.
    1 having a middle-sized body.
    -2 one of moderately full habit.
    -सूत्रम् = मध्यरेखा q. v.
    -स्थ a.
    1 being or standing in the middle, central.
    -2 intermediate, intervening.
    -3 middling.
    -4 mediating, acting as umpire between two parties.
    -5 impartial, neutral; सुहृन्मित्रार्युदासीनमध्यस्थ- द्वेष्यबन्धुषु... समबुद्धिर्विशिष्यते Bg.6.9.
    -6 indifferent, unconcerned; अन्या मध्यस्थचिन्ता तु विमर्दाभ्यधिकोदया Rām. 2.2.16; मध्यस्थो देशबन्धुषु Pt.4.6; वयमत्र मध्यस्थाः Ś.5.
    (-स्थः) 1 an umpire, arbitrator, a mediator.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्थता 1 intermediate position.
    -2 middle state or character.
    -3 mediocrity.
    -4 arbitra- tion, mediatorship.
    -5 impartiality; मध्यस्थतां गृहीत्वा भण M.3 'say impartially'; मध्यस्थतानैकतरोपहासः N.
    -6 indif- ference.
    -स्थलम्, -स्थली 1 the middle or centre.
    -2 the middle space or region.
    -3 the waist.
    -4 the hip; कुचौ मरिचसंनिभौ मुरजमध्यमध्यस्थली Udb.
    -स्थानम् 1 the middle station.
    -2 the middle space; i. e. air.
    -3 a neutral region.
    -स्थित a. central, intermediate.
    -ता indiffer- ence.
    -स्वरित a. having the स्वरित accent on the middle syllable.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > मध्य _madhya

  • 11 ÁT

    I) prep.
    A. with dative.
    I. Of motion;
    1) towards, against;
    Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;
    hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;
    Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;
    þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;
    3) to, at;
    koma at landi, to come to land;
    ganga at dómi, to go into court;
    4) along (= eptir);
    ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;
    dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;
    refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;
    5) denoting hostility;
    renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;
    gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;
    6) around;
    vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;
    bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;
    7) denoting business, engagement;
    ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;
    fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.
    II. Of position, &c.;
    1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;
    at kirkju, at church;
    at dómi, in court;
    at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;
    2) denoting participation in;
    vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;
    3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;
    kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;
    var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;
    4) with proper names of places (farms);
    konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;
    biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;
    at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;
    5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;
    at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;
    at Marðar, at Mara’s home;
    at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;
    at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).
    III. Of time;
    1) at, in;
    at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;
    at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;
    at páskum, at Easter;
    at kveldi, at eventide;
    at fjöru, at the ebb;
    at flœðum, at the floodtide;
    2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;
    at ári komanda, next year;
    at vári, er kemr, next spring;
    generally with ‘komanda’ understood;
    at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;
    3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;
    at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;
    at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;
    at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;
    at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;
    at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;
    at honum önduðum, after his death;
    4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;
    hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;
    skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;
    at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.
    IV. fig. and in various uses;
    1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;
    brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;
    verða at ormi, to become a snake;
    2) for, as;
    gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;
    eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;
    3) by;
    taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;
    draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;
    kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;
    auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;
    vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;
    5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;
    ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;
    6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;
    faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);
    aðili at sök = aðili sakar;
    7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;
    hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;
    mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;
    tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;
    kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;
    8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;
    Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);
    þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;
    hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;
    9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);
    at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;
    at landslögum, by the law of the land;
    at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;
    10) in adverbial phrases;
    gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;
    bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;
    at fullu, fully;
    at vísu, surely;
    at frjálsu, freely;
    at eilífu, for ever and ever;
    at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;
    at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;
    at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.
    B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);
    sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;
    at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;
    connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;
    at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.
    1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;
    at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;
    2) in an objective sense;
    hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;
    gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;
    3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).
    1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;
    hón grét at meir, she wept the more;
    þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;
    þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;
    2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);
    þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;
    sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.
    conj., that;
    1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;
    þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;
    vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;
    2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;
    svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;
    3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);
    4) since, because, as (= því at);
    5) connected with þó, því, svá;
    þó at (with subj.), though, although;
    því at, because, for;
    svá at, so that;
    6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;
    þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;
    þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;
    áðr at (= á. en), before;
    7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;
    Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;
    in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.
    V)
    negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.
    odda at, Yggs at, battle.
    * * *
    n. [éta, át, edere, A. S. ǽt], the act of eating, in the phrase, at öldri ok at áti, inter bibendum et edendum, Grág. ii. 170, N. G. L. i. 29; át ok drykkja, Fas. ii. 552, Orkn. 200; át ok atvinna, Stj. 143: of beasts, kýr hafnaði átinu, the cow (being sick) would not eat, Bs. i. 194.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > ÁT

  • 12 FYRIR

    * * *
    prep.
    I. with dat.
    1) before, in front of (ok vóru fyrir honum borin merkin);
    fyrir dyrum, before the door;
    2) before one, in one’s presence;
    hón nefndist fyrir þeim Gunnhildr, she told them that her name was G.;
    3) for;
    hann lét ryðja fyrir þeim búðina, he had the booth cleared for them, for their reception;
    4) before one, in one’s way;
    fjörðr varð fyrir þeim, they came to a fjord;
    sitja fyrir e-m, to lie in wait for one;
    5) naut. term. before, off;
    liggja fyrir bryggjum, to lie off the piers;
    fyrir Humru-mynni, off the Humber;
    6) before, at the head of, over;
    vera fyrir liði, to be over the troops;
    vera fyrir máli, to lead the case;
    sitja fyrir svörum, to undertake the defence;
    7) of time, ago;
    fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago;
    fyrir stundu, a while ago;
    fyrir löngu, long ago;
    vera fyrir e-u, to forebode (of a dream);
    8) before, above, superior to;
    Hálfdan svarti var fyrir þeim brœðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers;
    9) denoting disadvantige, harm, suffering;
    þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest E. thwart all thy affairs;
    tók at eyðast fyrir herm lausa-fé, her money began to fail;
    10) denoting obstacle, hindrance;
    mikit gøri þer mér fyrir þessu máli, you make this case hard for me;
    varð honum lítit fyrir því, it was a small matter for him;
    Ásgrími þótti þungt fyrir, A. thought that things looked bad;
    11) because of, for;
    hon undi sér hvergri fyrir verkjum, she had no rest for pains;
    fyrir hræðslu, for fear;
    illa fœrt fyrir ísum, scarcely, passable for ice;
    gáðu þeir eigi fyrir veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing, they neglected to make hay;
    fyrir því at, because, since, as;
    12) against;
    gæt þín vel fyrir konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men;
    beiða griða Baldri fyrir alls konar háska, against all kinds of harm;
    13) fyrir sér, of oneself;
    mikill fyrir sér, strong, powerful;
    minnstr fyrir sér, smallest, weakest;
    14) denoting manner or quality, with;
    hvítr fyrir hærum, while with hoary hair;
    II. with acc.
    1) before, in front of;
    halda fyrir augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes;
    2) before, into the presence of;
    stefna e-m fyrir dómstól, before a court;
    3) over;
    hlaupa fyrir björg, to leap over a precipice;
    kasta fyrir borð, to throw overboard;
    4) in one’s way, crossing one’s way;
    ríða á leið fyrir þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them;
    5) round, off;
    sigla fyrir nes, to weather a point;
    6) along, all along;
    fyrir endilangan Noreg, all along Norway, from one end to the other;
    draga ör fyrir odd, to draw the arrow past the point;
    7) of time, fyrir dag, before day;
    fyrir e-s minni, before one’s memory;
    8) for, on behalf of;
    vil ek bjóða at fara fyrir þik, I will offer to go for thee, in thy stead;
    lögvörn fyrir mál, a lawful defence for a case;
    9) for, for the benefit of;
    þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, they cut the lyme-grass for them (the horses);
    10) for, instead of, in place of, as;
    11) for, because of (vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit);
    fyrir þín orð, for thy words (intercession);
    fyrir sína vinsæld, by reason of his popularity;
    12) denoting value, price;
    fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks;
    fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost;
    13) in spite of, against (giptast fyrir ráð e-s);
    14) joined with adverbs ending in -an, governing acc. (fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan);
    fyrir austan, sunnan fjall, east, south of the fell;
    fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge;
    fyrir handan á, beyond the river;
    fyrir innan garð, inside the fence;
    III. as adverb or ellipt.
    1) ahead, before, opp. to eptir;
    þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, when this came first, preceded;
    2) first;
    mun ek þar eptir gera sem þér gerit fyrir, I shall do to you according as you do first;
    3) at hand, present, to the fore;
    föng þau, er fyrir vóru, stores that were at hand;
    þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already present (before the bride and bridegroom came);
    4) e-m verðr e-t fyrir, one takes a certain step, acts so and so;
    Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. was at a loss what to do;
    e-t mælist vel (illa) fyrir, a thing is well (ill) spoken or reported of (kvæðit mæltist vel fyrir).
    * * *
    prep., in the Editions spelt differently; in MSS. this word is usually abbreviated either  (i. e. firir), or Ꝼ̆, fur͛, fvr͛ (i. e. fyrir); in some MSS. it is idiomatically spelt with i, fir͛, e. g. Arna-Magn. 382 (Bs. i. 263 sqq.); and even in the old Miracle-book Arna-Magn. 645 (Bs. i. 333 sqq.), just as ifir is written for yfir ( over); in a few MSS. it is written as a monosyllable fyr, e. g. D. I. i. 475, Mork. passim; in Kb. (Sæm.-Edda) occurs fyr telia, Vsp. I; fyr norðan, 36; fyr dyrum, Gm. 22; fyr vestan ver, Hkv. 2. 8; in other places as a dissyll. fyrir, e. g. Hm. 56, Gm. 54, Skm. 34, Ls. 15, Am. 64, Hkv. 2. 2, 19 (quoted from Bugge’s edition, see his preface, p. xvi); fyr and fyrir stand to one another in the same relation as ept to eptir, und to undir, of ( super) to yfir: this monosyllabic form is obsolete, save in the compds, where ‘for-’ is more common than ‘fyrir-;’ in some cases both forms are used, e. g. for-dæming and fyrir-dæming; in others only one, but without any fixed rule: again, the forms fyri, fyre, or fire, which are often used in Edd., are just as wrong, as if one were to say epti, undi, yfi; yet this spelling is found now and then in MSS., as, fyre, Ó. H. (facsimile); fire, Grág. Sb. ii. 288 (also facsimile): the particles í and á are sometimes added, í fur, Fms. iv. 137; í fyrir, passim; á fur, Haustl. 1. [Ulf. faur and faura; A. S. fore and for; Engl. for and fore-; Germ. für and vor; Dan. for; Swed. för; Gr. προ-; Lat. pro, prae.]
    WITH DAT., chiefly without the notion of movement.
    A. LOCAL:
    I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrum, before the doors, at the doors, Nj. 14, Vsp. 53, Hm. 69, Edda 130; niðr f. smiðju-dyrum, Eg. 142:—ahead, úti fyrir búðinni, Nj. 181; kómusk sauðirnir upp á fjallit f. þeim, ahead of them, 27; vóru fyrir honum borin merkin, the banner was borne before him, 274; göra orð fyrir sér, to send word before one, Fms. vii. 207, Hkr. iii. 335 (Ó. H. 201, l. c., frá sér):—also denoting direction, niðri í eldinum f. sér, beneath in the fire before them, Nj. 204; þeir sá f. sér bæ mikinn, they saw before them a great building, i. e. they came to a great house, Eg. 546; öðrum f. sér ( in front) en öðrum á bak sér, Grág. i. 5.
    2. before one, before one’s face, in one’s presence; úhelgaða ek Otkel f. búum, before the neighbours, Nj. 87; lýsi ek f. búum fimm, 218; lýsa e-u ( to proclaim) f. e-m, Ld. 8; hann hermdi boð öll f. Gizuri, Nj. 78; hón nefndisk f. þeim Gunnhildr, told them that her name was G., Fms. i. 8; kæra e-t f. e-m, Ó. H. 60; slíkar fortölur hafði hann f. þeim, Nj. 200; the saying, því læra börnin málið að það er f. þeim haft, bairns learn to speak because it is done before them, i. e. because they hear it; hafa gott (íllt) f. e-m, to give a good (bad) example, e. g. in the presence of children; lifa vel f. Guði, to live well before God, 623. 29; stór ábyrgðar-hluti f. Guði, Nj. 199; sem þeir sjá réttast f. Guði, Grág. i. (pref.); fyrir öllum þeim, Hom. 89; á laun f. öðrum mönnum, hidden from other men, unknown to them, Grág. i. 337, Jb. 378; nú skaltú vera vin minn mikill f. húsfreyju minni, i. e. when you talk to my wife, Nj. 265; fyrir Drottni, before the Lord, Merl. 2. 78.
    3. denoting reception of guests, visitors; hann lét ryðja f. þeim búðina, he had the room cleared for them, for their reception, Nj. 228; Valhöll ryðja fyr vegnu fólki, i. e. to clear Valhalla for slain folk, Em. I; ryðja vígvöll f. vegundum, Nj. 212; ljúka upp f. e-m, to open the door for one, Fms. xi. 323, Stj. 5; rýma pallinn f. þeim, Eg. 304; hann lét göra eld f. þeim, he had a fire made for them, 204; þeir görðu eld. f. sér, Fms. xi. 63; … veizlur þar sem fyrir honum var búit, banquets that were ready for him, Eg. 45.
    II. before one, in one’s way; þar er díki varð f. þeim, Eg. 530; á (fjörðr) varð f. þeim, a river, fjord, was before them, i. e. they came to it, 133, 161; at verða eigi f. liði yðru, 51; maðr sá varð f. Vindum, that man was overtaken by the V., Hkr. iii. 363; þeirra manna er f. honum urðu, Eg. 92.
    2. sitja f. e-m, to lie in wait for one, Ld. 218, Nj. 107; lá f. henni í skóginum, Edda (pref.); sitja f. rekum, to sit watching for wrecks, Eg. 136 (fyrir-sát).
    3. ellipt., menn urðu at gæta sín er f. urðu, Nj. 100; Egill var þar f. í runninum, E. was before (them), lay in ambush, Eg. 378; hafði sá bana er f. varð, who was before (the arrow), i. e. he was hit, Nj. 8.
    4. verða f. e-u, to be hit, taken, suffer from a thing; ef hann verðr f. drepi, if he be struck, Grág. ii. 19; verða f. áverka, to be wounded, suffer injury, Ld. 140; verða f. reiði konungs, to fall into disgrace with the king, Eg. 226; verða f. ósköpum, to become the victim of a spell, spell-bound, Fas. i. 130; sitja f. hvers manns ámæli, to be the object of all men’s blame, Nj. 71; vera eigi f. sönnu hafðr, to be unjustly charged with a thing, to be innocent.
    III. a naut. term, before, off; liggja f. bryggjum, to lie off the pier, Ld. 166; skip fljóta f. strengjum, Sks. 116; þeir lágu f. bænum, they lay off the town, Bs. i. 18; liggja úti f. Jótlands-síðu, off Jutland, Eg. 261; hann druknaði f. Jaðri, off the J., Fms. i. II; þeir kómu at honum f. Sjólandi, off Zealand, x. 394; hafa úti leiðangr f. landi, Hkr. i. 301; f. Humru-minni, off the Humber, Orkn. 338, cp. Km. 3, 8, 9, 13, 19, 21; fyrir Nesjum, off the Ness, Vellekla; fyrir Tungum, Sighvat; fyrir Spáni, off Spain, Orkn. 356.
    IV. before, at the head of, denoting leadership; smalamaðr f. búi föður síns, Ver. 26 (of king David); vera f. liði, to be over the troops, Eg. 292, Nj. 7; vera f. máli, to lead the case, Band. 8; vera forstjóri f. búi, to be steward over the household, Eg. 52; ráða f. landi, ríki, etc., to rule, govern, Ó H. 33, Nj. 5; hverr f. eldinum réði, who was the ringleader of the fire, Eg. 239; ráða f. e-u, to rule, manage a thing, passim: the phrase, sitja f. svörum, to respond on one’s behalf, Ölk. 36, Band. 12; hafa svör f. e-m, to be the chief spokesman, Fms. x. 101, Dipl. v. 26.
    V. special usages; friða f. e-m, to make peace for one, Fms. vii. 16, Bs. i. 65; bæta f. e-m, to make things good for one, Hom. 109; túlka, vera túlkr, flytja (etc.) f. e-m, to plead for one, Fms. iii. 33, Nj. 128,—also spilla f. e-m, to disparage one, Eg. 255; haga, ætla f. e-u, to manage, arrange for one, Ld. 208, Sturl. i. 14, Boll. 356; rífka ráð f. e-m, to better one’s condition, Nj. 21; ráða heiman-fylgju ok tilgjöf f. frændkonu sinni, Js. 58; standa f. manni, to stand before, shield a man, stand between him and his enemy, Eg. 357, Grág. ii. 13; vera skjöldr f. e-m, 655 xxxii. 4; hafa kostnað f. e-u, to have the expences for a thing, Ld. 14; vinna f. e-m, to support one by one’s work, Sks. 251; starfa f. fé sínu, to manage one’s money, Ld. 166; hyggja f. e-u, to take heed for a thing, Nj. 109; hyggja f. sér, Fs. 5; hafa forsjá f. e-m, to provide for one, Ld. 186; sjá f. e-u, to see after, Eg. 118, Landn, 152; sjá þú nokkut ráð f. mér, Nj. 20: ironic. to put at rest, Háv. 40: ellipt., sjá vel f., to provide well for, Nj. 102.
    B. TEMP. ago; fyrir þrem nóttum, three nights ago; fyrir stundu, a while ago, Nj. 80; fyrir litlu, a little while ago, Fms. i. 76, Ld. 134; fyrir skömmu, a sbort while ago; fyrir löngu, a long while ago, Nj. 260, Fms. i. 50; fyrir öndverðu, from the beginning, Grág. i. 80, ii. 323, 394, Finnb. 342; fyrir þeim, before they were born, Fms. i. 57.
    2. the phrase, vera f. e-u, to forebode; vera f. stórfundum, Nj. 107, 277; þat hygg ek vera munu f. siða-skipti, Fms. xi. 12; þessi draumr mun vera f. kvámu nökkurs manns, vii. 163; dreyma draum f. e-u, 8; fyrir tiðendum, ii. 65:—spá f. e-m, to ‘spae’ before, prophecy to one, Nj. 171.
    C. METAPH.:
    I. before, above; þóttu þeir þar f. öllum ungum mönnum, Dropl. 7; þykkisk hann mjök f. öðrum mönnum, Ld. 38; ver f. hirðmönnum, be first among my herdsmen, Eg. 65; Hálfdan svarti var f. þeim bræðrum, H. was the foremost of the brothers, Fms. i. 4; þorgrímr var f. sonum Önundar, Grett. 87; var Haraldr mest f. þeim at virðingu, Fms. i. 47.
    II. denoting help, assistance; haun skal rétta vættið f. þeim, Grág. i. 45 (vide above A. IV and V).
    2. the following seem to be Latinisms, láta lífit f. heilagri Kristni, to give up one’s life for holy Christianity, = Lat. pro, Fms. vii. 172; ganga undir píslir fyrir Guðs nafni, Blas. 38; gjalda önd mína f. önd þinni, Johann. 17; gefa gjöf f. sál sinni ( pro animâ suâ), H. E. i. 466; fyrir mér ok minni sál, Dipl. iv. 8; færa Guði fórnir f. e-m, 656 A; heita f. e-m, biðja f. e-m, to make a vow, pray for one (orare pro), Fms. iii. 48, Bs. i. 70; biðja f. mönnum, to intercede for, 19, Fms. xi. 287: even with a double construction, biðja f. stað sinn (acc., which is vernacular) ok heilagri kirkju (dat., which is a Latinism), x. 127.
    III. denoting disadvantage, harm, suffering; þú lætr Egil vefja öll mál fyrir þér, thou lettest Egil thwart all thy affairs, Eg. 249; únýtir hann þá málit fyrir sér, then he ruins his own case, Grág. i. 36, Dropl. 14, 16; Manverjar rufu safnaðinn f. Þorkatli, the Manxmen broke up the assembly, i. e. forsook Thorkel, Fms. ix. 422; kom upp grátr f. henni, she burst into tears, 477; taka fé f. öðrum, to take another’s money, N. G. L. i. 20; knörr þann er konungr lét taka fyrir Þórólfi, Landn. 56; ef hross verðr tekit f. honum, if a horse of his be taken, Grág. i. 436; hann tók upp fé fyrir öllum, he seized property for them all, Ó. H. 60; e-t ferr ílla f. e-m, a thing turns out ill for one; svá fór f. Ólófu, so it came to pass for O., Vígl. 18; loka dyrr f. e-m, to lock the door in one’s face, Edda 21: þeir hafa eigi þessa menn f. yðr drepit, heldr f. yðrar sakir þessi víg vegit, i. e. they have not harmed you, but rather done you a service in slaying those men, Fbr. 33; tók at eyðask f. henni lausa-fé, her money began to fail, Nj. 29; rak á f. þeim storma ok stríðviðri, they were overtaken by gales and bad weather, Vígl. 27; Víglundr rak út knöttinn f. Jökli, V. drove the ball for J., i. e. so that he had to run after it, 24; sá er skar tygil f. Þóri, he who cut Thor’s line, Bragi; sverð brast f. mér, my sword broke, Korm. 98 (in a verse); brjóta e-t f. e-m, to break a thing for one, Bs. i. 15 (in a verse); Valgarðr braut krossa fyrir Merði ok öll heilög tákn, Nj. 167; árin brotnaði f. honum, his oar broke; allar kýrnar drápust fyrir honum, all his cows died.
    2. denoting difficulty, hindrance; sitja f. sæmd e-s, to sit between oneself and one’s honour, i. e. to hinder one’s doing well, Sturl. 87; mikit göri þér mér f. þessu máli, you make this case sore for me, Eb. 124; þér er mikit f. máli, thy case stands ill, Fms. v. 325; ekki er Guði f. því, it is easy for God to do, 656 B. 9; varð honum lítið f. því, it was a small matter for him, he did it easily, Grett. III; mér er minna f. því, it is easier for me, Am. 60; þykkja mikit f. e-u, to be much grieved for a thing, do it unwillingly, Nj. 77; Icel. also say, þykja fyrir (ellipt.), to feel hurt, be displeased:—ellipt., er þeim lítið fyrir at villa járnburð þenna, it is a small matter for them to spoil this ordeal, Ó. H. 140; sem sér muni lítið f. at veiða Gunnar, Nj. 113; fast mun f. vera, it will be fast-fixed before (one), hard to move, Ld. 154; Ásgrími þótti þungt f., A. thought that things looked sad (heavy), Nj. 185; hann var lengi f., he was long about it, Fms. x. 205; hann var lengi f. ok kvað eigi nei við, he was cross and said not downright no, Þorf. Karl. 388.
    IV. in a causal sense, for, because of, Lat. per, pro; sofa ek né mákat fugls jarmi fyrir, I cannot sleep for the shrill cry of birds, Edda 16 (in a verse); hon undi sér hvergi f. verkjum, she had no rest for pains, Bjarn. 69; fyrir gráti, tárum, = Lat. prae lacrymis; fyrir harmi, for sorrow; f. hlátri, for laughter, as in Engl.; þeir æddust f. einni konu, they went mad for the sake of one woman, Sól. 11; ílla fært f. ísum, scarce passable for ice, Fms. xi. 360; hætt var at sitja útar f. Miðgarðs-ormi, Edda 35; hann var lítt gengr f. sárinu, he could hardly walk for the wound, Fbr. 178; fyrir hræðslu, for fear, Hbl. 26; heptisk vegrinn f. þeim meinvættum sem …, Fs. 4; gáðu þeir eigi f. veiðum at fá heyjanna, because of fishing they took no care to make hay, Landn. 30; fyrir riki konungs, for the king’s power, Eg. 67, 117; fyrir ofríki manna, Grág. i. 68; fyrir hví, for why? Eluc. 4; fyrir hví þeir væri þar, Eg. 375; fyrir því, at …, for that, because, Edda 35, Fms. i. 22, vii. 330, Ld. 104; en fyrir því nú at, now since, Skálda 171; nú fyrir því at, id., 169: the phrase, fyrir sökum, for the sake of, because of, passim; vide sök.
    V. by, by the force of; öxlin gékk ór liði fyrir högginu, the shoulder was disjointed by the force of the stroke, Háv. 52.
    2. denoting contest; falla f. e-m, to fall before one, i. e. fighting against one, Fms. i. 7, iv. 9, x. 196; verða halloki f. e-m, to be overcome in fighting one, Ld. 146; látask f. e-m, to perish by one, Eb. 34; hafa bana f. e-m, to be slain by one, Nj. 43; þeir kváðu fá fúnað hafa f. honum, 263; mæddisk hann f. þeim, he lost his breath in fighting them, Eg. 192; láta ríki f. e-m, to lose the kingdom before another, i. e. so that the latter gains it, 264; láta lausar eignir mínar f. þér, 505; láta hlut sinn f. e-m, Fs. 47; standask f. e-m, to stand one’s ground before one, Edda (pref.); hugðisk hann falla mundu f. sjóninni einni saman, that he would sink before his glance, 28, Hým. 12; halda hlut f. e-m, Ld. 54; halda frið ok frelsi f. várum óvinum, Fms. viii. 219; fara mun ek sem ek hefi áðr ætlað f. þínum draum ( thy dream notwithstanding), Ld. 216; þér farit hvárt er þér vilit f. mér, you go wherever you like for me, so far as I am concerted, Fær. 37; halda vöku f. sér, to keep oneself awake, Fms. i. 216.
    β. with verbs, flýja, hlaupa, renna, stökkva f. e-m, to fly, leap, run before one, i. e. to be pursued, Bs. i. 774, Grág. ii. 359; at hann rynni f. þrælum hans, Ld. 64; fyrir þessum úfriði stökk Þangbrandr til Noregs, 180; skyldi hann ganga ór á f. Hofsmönnum, Landn. 178; ganga f. e-u, to give way before, yield to a thing, Fms. i. 305, x. 292; vægja f. e-m, to yield to one, give way, Eg. 21, 187, Nj. 57, Ld. 234.
    VI. against; verja land f. e-m, Eg. 32; verja landit f. Dönum ok öðrum víkingum, Fms. i. 23; til landvarnar f. víkingum, Eg. 260; landvarnar-maðr f. Norðmönnum, Fms. vi. 295; gæta brúarinnar f. bergrisum, Edda 17; gæt þín vel f. konungi ok hans mönnum, guard thee well against the king and his men, Eg. 113; góð aðstoð f. tröllum ok dvergum, Bárð. 163; beiða Baldri griða f. allskonar háska, Edda 36; auðskæðr f. höggum, Eg. 770.
    VII. in the sense of being driven before; fyrir straumi, veðri, vindi, before the stream, wind, weather (forstreymis, forvindis), Grág. ii. 384, Fms. vii. 262; halda f. veðri, to stand before the wind, Róm. 211.
    2. rýrt mun verða f. honum smá-mennit, he will have an easy game with the small people, Nj. 94: ellipt., hafði sá bana er f. varð, 8; sprakk f., 16, 91.
    VIII. fyrir sér, of oneself, esp. of physical power; mikill f. sér, strong, powerful; lítill f. sér, weak, feeble, Nj. 20, Ísl. ii. 368, Eg. 192; þér munuð kalla mik lítinn mann f. mér, Edda 33; minnstr f. sér, smallest, weakest, Eg. 123; gildr maðr f. sér, Ísl. ii. 322, Fms. ii. 145; herðimaðr mikiil f. sér, a hardy man, Nj. 270; hvat ert þú f. þér, what kind of fellow art thou? Clem. 33; vera einn f. sér, to be a strange fellow, Grett. 79 new Ed.; Icel. also say, göra mikið (lítið) f. sér, to make oneself big ( little).
    β. sjóða e-t f. sér, to hesitate, saunter, Nj. 154; mæla f. munni, to talk between one’s teeth, to mutter, Orkn. 248, Nj. 249.
    IX. denoting manner or quality; hvítr f. hærum, white with hoary hairs, Fms. vi. 95, Fas. ii. 540; gráir fyrir járnum, grey with steel, of a host in armour, Mag. 5; hjölt hvít f. silfri, a hilt white with silver = richly silvered, Eb. 226.
    X. as adverb or ellipt.,
    1. ahead, in front, = á undan, Lat. prae, opp. to eptir; þá var eigi hins verra eptir ván, er slíkt fór fyrir, as this came first, preceded, Nj. 34; at einhverr mundi fara heim fyrir, that some one would go home first (to spy), Eg. 580; Egill fór f., E. went in before, id.; at vér ríðim þegar f. í nótt, 283.
    β. first; hann stefndi f. málinu, en hann mælti eptir, one pronounced the words first, but the other repeated after him, Nj. 35; mun ek þar eptir göra sem þér gerit f., I shall do to you according as you do first, 90:—temp., sjau nóttum f., seven nights before, Grág. ii. 217.
    2. to the fore, at hand, present; þar var fyrir fjöldi boðsmanna, a host of guests was already to the fore, i. e. before the bride and bridegroom came, Nj. 11; úvíst er at vita hvar úvinir sitja á fleti fyrir, Hm. 1; skal þá lögmaðr þar f. vera, he shall be there present, Js. 3; heima í túni fyrir, Fær. 50; þar vóru fyrir Hildiríðar-synir, Eg. 98; var honum allt kunnigt fyrir, he knew all about the localities, 583; þeim ómögum, sem f. eru, who are there already, i. e. in his charge, Grág. i. 286: of things, föng þau er f. vóru, stores that were to the fore, at hand, Eg. 134.
    3. fore, opp. to ‘back,’ of clothes; slæður settar f. allt gullknöppum, Eg. 516; bak ok fyrir, back and front, = bak ok brjóst, Mar.
    XI. in the phrase, e-m verðr e-t fyrir, a thing is before one, i. e. one takes that and that step, acts so and so in an emergency; nú verðr öðrum þeirra þat f., at hann kveðr, now if the other part alleges, that …, Grág. i. 362; Kolbeini varð ekki f., K. had no resource, i. e. lost his head, Sturl. iii. 285:—the phrase, e-t mælisk vel (ílla) fyrir, a thing is well ( ill) reported of; víg Gunnars spurðisk ok mæltisk ílla fyrir um allar sveitir, Nj. 117, Sturl. ii. 151; mun þat vel f. mælask, people will like it well, Nj. 29, Þórð. 55 new Ed.; ílla mun þat f. mælask at ganga á sættir við frændr sína, Ld. 238; ok er lokit var, mæltisk kvæðit vel f., the people praised the poem, Fms. vii. 113.
    XII. in special senses, either as prep. or adv. (vide A. V. above); segja leið f. skipi, to pilot a ship, Eg. 359; segja f. skipi, to say a prayer for a new ship or for any ship going to sea, Bs. i. 774, Fms. x. 480; mæla f. e-u, to dictate, Grág. ii. 266; mæla f. minni, to bring out a toast, vide minni; mæla f. sætt, i. 90; skipa, koma e-u f., to arrange, put right; ætla f. e-u, to make allowance for; trúa e-m f. e-u, to entrust one with; það fer mikið f. e-u (impers.), it is of great compass, bulky; hafa f. e-u, to have trouble with a thing; leita f. sér, to enquire; biðjask f., to say one’s prayers, vide biðja; mæla fyrir, segja f., etc., to order, Nj. 103, Js. 3: of a spell or solemn speaking, hann mælti svá f., at …, Landn. 34; spyrjask f., to enquire, Hkr. ii. 333; búask f., to prepare, make arrangement, Landn. 35, Sks. 551; skipask f., to draw up, Nj. 197; leggjask f., to lie down in despair, Bs. i. 194; spá fyrir, to ‘spae’ before, foretell; þeir menn er spá f. úorðna hluti, Fms. i. 96; segja f., to foretell, 76, Bb. 332; Njáll hefir ok sagt f. um æfi hans, Nj. 102; vita e-t f., to ‘wit’ beforehand, know the future, 98; sjá e-t f., to foresee, 162; ef þat er ætlat f., fore-ordained, id.
    WITH ACC., mostly with the notion of movement.
    A. LOCAL:
    I. before, in front of; fyrir dyrrin, Nj. 198; láta síga brýnn f. brár, Hkv. Hjörv. 19; halda f. augu sér, to hold (one’s hands) before one’s eyes, Nj. 132; leggja sverði fyrir brjóst e-m, to thrust a sword into his breast, 162, Fs. 39.
    2. before one, before a court; stefna e-m f. dómstól, Fms. xi. 444; ganga, koma f. e-n, to go, come before one, Fms. i. 15, Eg. 426, Nj. 6, 129, passim; fyrir augu e-s, before one’s eyes, Stj. 611.
    3. before, so as to shield; hann kom skildinum f. sik, he put the shield before him, Nj. 97, 115; halda skildi f. e-n, a duelling term, since the seconder had to hold one’s shield, Ísl. ii. 257.
    4. joined to adverbs such as fram, aptr, út, inn, ofan, niðr, austr, vestr, suðr, norðr, all denoting direction; fram f., forward; aptr f., backward, etc.; hann reiddi öxina fram f. sik, a stroke forward with the axe, Fms. vii. 91; hann hljóp eigi skemra aptr en fram fyrir sik, Nj. 29; þótti honum hann skjóta brandinum austr til fjallanna f. sik, 195; komask út f. dyrr, to go outside the door, Eg. 206:—draga ofan f. brekku, to drag over the hill, Ld. 220; hrinda f. mel ofan, to thrust one over the gravel bank, Eg. 748; hlaupa f. björg, to leap over a precipice, Eb. 62, Landn. 36; elta e-n f. björg, Grág. ii. 34; hlaupa (kasta) f. borð, to leap ( throw) overboard, Fms. i. 178, Hkr. iii. 391, Ld. 226; síga ( to be hauled) niðr f. borgar-vegg, 656 C. 13, Fms. ix. 3; hlaupa niðr f. stafn, Eg. 142; niðr f. skaflinn, Dropl. 25; fyrir brekku, Orkn. 450, Glúm. 395 (in a verse).
    II. in one’s way, crossing one’s way; þeir stefndu f. þá, Fms. ix. 475; ríða á leið f. þá, to ride in their way, so as to meet them, Boll. 348; hlaupa ofan f. þá, Nj. 153; vóru allt komin f. hann bréf, letters were come before him, in his way, Fms. vii. 207; þeir felldu brota f. hann, viz. they felled trees before him, so as to stop him, viii. 60, ix. 357; leggja bann f. skip, to lay an embargo on a ship, Ld. 166.
    III. round, off a point; fyrir nesit, Nj. 44; út f. Holm, out past the Holm, Fms. vii. 356: esp. as a naut. term, off a point on the shore, sigla f. England, Norðyrnbraland, Þrasnes, Spán, to sail by the coast of, stand off England, Northumberland, … Spain, Orkn. 338, 340, 342, 354; fyrir Yrjar, Fms. vii. (in a verse); fyrir Siggju, Aumar, Lista, Edda 91 (in a verse); er hann kom f. Elfina, when be came off the Gotha, Eg. 80; leggja land f. skut, to lay the land clear of the stern, i. e. to pass it, Edda l. c.; göra frið f. land sitt, to pacify the land from one end to another, Ld. 28; fyrir uppsprettu árinnar, to come to ( round) the sources of the river, Fms. iii. 183; fyrir garðs-enda, Grág. ii. 263; girða f. nes, to make a wall across the ness, block it up, cp. Lat. praesepire, praemunire, etc., Grág. ii. 263; so also binda f. op, poka, Lat. praeligare, praestringere; hlaða f. gat, holu, to stop a hole, opening; greri f. stúfinn, the stump (of the arm or leg) was healed, closed, Nj. 275; skjóta slagbrandi f. dyrr, to shoot a bolt before the door, to bar it, Dropl. 29; láta loku (lás) f. hurð, to lock a door, Gísl. 28; setja innsigli f. bréf, to set a seal to a letter, Dipl. i. 3: ellipt., setr hón þar lás fyrir, Ld. 42, Bs. i. 512.
    2. along, all along; f. endilanga Danmörk, f. endilangan Noreg, all along Denmark, Norway, from one end to the other, Fms. iv. 319, xi. 91, Grett. 97:—öx álnar f. munn, an axe with an ell-long edge, Ld. 276; draga ör f. ödd, to draw the arrow past the point, an archer’s term, Fms. ii. 321.
    IV. with verbs, fyrir ván komit, one is come past hope, all hope is gone, Sturl. i. 44, Hrafn. 13, Fms. ii. 131; taka f. munn e-m, to stop one’s mouth; taka f. háls, kverkar, e-m, to seize one by the throat, etc.; taka mál f. munn e-m, ‘verba alicujus praeripere,’ to take the word out of one’s mouth, xi. 12; taka f. hendr e-m, to seize one’s hands, stop one in doing a thing, Eb. 124; mod., taka fram f. hendrnar á e-m.
    B. TEMP.: fyrir dag, before day, Eg. 80; f. miðjan dag, Ld. 14; f. sól, before sunrise, 268; f. sólar-lag, before sunset; f. miðjan aptan, Nj. 192; f. náttmál, 197; f. óttu, Sighvat; f. þinglausnir, Ölk. 37; f. Jól, Nj. 269; f. fardaga, Grág. ii. 341; viku f. sumar, 244; f. mitt sumar, Nj. 138; litlu f. vetr, Eg. 159; f. vetrnætr, Grág. ii. 217; f. e-s minni, before one’s memory, Íb. 16.
    C. METAPH.:
    I. above, before; hann hafdi mest fyrir aðra konunga hraustleikinn, Fms. x. 372.
    II. for, on behalf of; vil ek bjóða at fara f. þik, I will go for thee, in thy stead, Nj. 77; ganga í skuld f. e-n, Grág. i. 283; Egill drakk … ok svá f. Ölvi, Eg. 210; kaupa e-t f. e-n, Nj. 157; gjalda gjöld f. e-n, Grág. i. 173; verja, sækja, sakir f. e-n, Eg. 504; hvárr f. sik, each for oneself, Dipl. v. 26; sættisk á öll mál f. Björn, Nj. 266; tók sættir f. Björn, Eg. 168; svara f. e-t, Fms. xi. 444; hafa til varnir f. sik, láta lýrit, lög-vörn koma f.; færa vörn f. sik, etc.; verja, sækja sakir f. sik, and many similar law phrases, Grág. passim; biðja konu f. e-n, to woo a lady for another, Fms. x. 44; fyrir mik, on my behalf, for my part, Gs. 16; lögvörn f. mál, a lawful defence for a case, Nj. 111; hafa til varnar f. sök, to defend a case, Grág. i. 61; halda skiladómi f. e-t, Dipl. iv. 8; festa lög f. e-t, vide festa.
    III. in a distributive sense; penning f. mann, a penny per man, K. Þ. K. 88; fyrir nef hvert, per nose = per head, Lv. 89, Fms. i. 153, Ó. H. 141; hve f. marga menn, for how many men, Grág. i. 296; fyrir hverja stiku, for each yard, 497.
    IV. for, for the benefit of; brjóta brauð f. hungraða, Hom. 75; þeir skáru f. þá melinn, they cut the straw for them (the horses), Nj. 265; leggja kostnað f. e-n, to defray one’s costs, Grág. i. 341.
    V. for, instead of; hann setti sik f. Guð, Edda (pref.); hafa e-n f. Guð (Lat. pro Deo), Stj. 73, Barl. 131; geta, fá, kveðja mann f. sik, to get a man as one’s delegate or substitute, Grág. i. 48 passim; þeir höfðu vargstakka f. brynjur, Fs. 17; manna-höfuð vóru f. kljána, Nj. 275; gagl f. gás ok grís f. gamalt svín, Ó. H. 86; rif stór f. hlunna, Háv. 48; buðkr er f. húslker er hafðr, Vm. 171; auga f. auga, tönn f. tönn, Exod. xxi. 24; skell f. skillinga, Þkv. 32.
    VI. because of, for; vilja Gunnar dauðan fyrir höggit, Nj. 92, Fms. v. 162; eigi f. sakleysi, not without ground, i. 302; fyrir hvat (why, for what) stefndi Gunnarr þeim til úhelgi? Nj. 101; ok urðu f. þat sekir, Landn. 323; hafa ámæli f. e-t, Nj. 65, passim.
    2. in a good sense, for one’s sake, for one; fyrir þín orð, for thy words, intercession, Ísl. ii. 217; vil ek göra f. þín orð, Ld. 158, Nj. 88; fyrir sína vinsæld, by his popularity, Fms. i. 259: the phrase, fyrir e-s sök, for one’s sake, vide sök: in swearing, a Latinism, fyrir trú mína, by my faith! (so in Old Engl. ‘fore God), Karl. 241; fyrir þitt líf, Stj. 514; ek særi þik f. alla krapta Krists ok manndóm þinn, Nj. 176. VII. for, at, denoting value, price; fyrir þrjár merkr, for three marks, Eg. 714; er sik leysti út f. þrjú hundruð marka, Fms. ix. 421; ganga f. hundrað, to pass or go for a hundred, D. I. i. 316:—also of the thing bought, þú skalt reiða f. hana þrjár merkr, thou shall pay for her three marks, Ld. 30; fyrir þik skulu koma mannhefndir, Nj. 57; bætr f. víg, Ísl. ii. 274; bætr f. mann, Eg. 259, passim; fyrir áverka Þorgeirs kom legorðs-sökin, Nj. 101:—so in the phrase, fyrir hvern mun, by all means, at any cost; fyrir öngan mun, by no means, Fms. i. 9, 157, Gþl. 531:—hafði hverr þeirra mann f. sik, eða tvá …, each slew a man or more for himself, i. e. they sold their lives dearly, Ó. H. 217.
    2. ellipt., í staðinn f., instead of, Grág. i. 61; hér vil ek bjóða f. góð boð, Nj. 77; taka umbun f., Fms. vii. 161; svara slíku f. sem …, Boll. 350; þér skulut öngu f. týna nema lífinu, you shall lose nothing less than your head, Nj. 7.
    VIII. by means of, by, through; fyrir þat sama orð, Stj.; fyrir sína náttúru, Fms. v. 162; fyrir messu-serkinn, iii. 168; fyrir þinn krapt ok frelsis-hönd, Pass. 19. 12; svikin f. orminn, by the serpent, Al. 63,—this use of fyrir seems to be a Latinism, but is very freq. in eccl. writings, esp. after the Reformation, N. T., Pass., Vídal.; fyrir munn Davíðs, through the mouth of David, etc.:—in good old historical writings such instances are few; þeir hlutuðu f. kast ( by dice), Sturl. ii. 159.
    IX. in spite of, against; fyrir vilja sinn, N. G. L. i. 151; fyrir vitorð eðr vilja e-s, against one’s will or knowledge, Grág. ii. 348; kvángask (giptask) f. ráð e-s, i. 177, 178, Þiðr. 190; nú fara menn f. bann ( in spite of an embargo) landa á milli, Gþl. 517; hann gaf henni líf f. framkvæmd farar, i. e. although she had not fulfilled her journey ( her vow), Fms. v. 223; fyrir várt lof, vi. 220; fyrir allt þat, in spite of all that, Grett. 80 new Ed.; fyrir ráð fram, heedlessly; fyrir lög fram, vide fram.
    X. denoting capacity, in the same sense as ‘at,’ C. II, p. 27, col. 1; scarcely found in old writers (who use ‘at’), but freq. in mod. usage, thus, eigi e-n f. vin, to have one for a friend, in old writers ‘at vin;’ hafa e-n f. fífl, fól, to make sport of one.
    2. in old writers some phrases come near to this, e. g. vita f. vist, to know for certain, Dipl. i. 3; vita f. full sannindi, id., ii. 16; hafa f. satt, to take for sooth, believe, Nj. 135; koma f. eitt, to come ( turn) all to one, Lv. 11, Nj. 91, Fms. i. 208; koma f. ekki, to come to naught, be of no avail, Ísl. ii. 215; fyrir hitt mun ganga, it will turn the other way, Nj. 93; fyrir hann er einskis örvænt orðs né verks, from him everything may be expected, Ísl. ii. 326; hafa e-s víti f. varnað, to have another’s faults for warning, Sól. 19.
    XI. joined with adverbs ending in -an, fyrir austan, vestan, sunnan, norðan, útan, innan, framan, handan, ofan, neðan, either with a following acc. denoting. direction, thus, fyrir austan, sunnan … fjall, east, south of the fell, i. e. on the eastern, southern side; fyrir neðan brú, below the bridge; fyrir útan fjall = Lat. ultra; fyrir innan fjall = Lat. infra; fyrir handan á, beyond the river; fyrir innan garð, inside the yard; fyrir ofan garð, above, beyond the yard, etc.; vide these adverbs:—used adverb., fyrir sunnan, in the south; fyrir vestan, in the west; fyrir norðan, in the north; fyrir austan, in the east,—current phrases in Icel. to mark the quarters of the country, cp. the ditty in Esp. Árb. year 1530; but not freq. in old writers, who simply say, norðr, suðr …, cp. Kristni S. ch. 1: absol. and adverb., fyrir ofan, uppermost; fyrir handan, on the other side:—fyrir útan e-t, except, save, Anal. 98, Vkv. 8; fyrir fram, vide fram.
    ☞ For- and fyrir- as prefixes, vide pp. 163–167 and below:
    I. fore-, for-, meaning before, above, in the widest sense, local, temp., and metaph. furthering or the like, for-dyri, for-nes, for-ellri, for-beini, etc.
    β. before, down, for-brekkis, -bergis, -streymis, -vindis, -viðris, etc.
    2. in an intens. sense = before others, very, but not freq.; for-dyld, -góðr, -hagr, -hraustr, -kostuligr, -kuðr, -lítill, -ljótr, -prís, -ríkr, -snjallr.
    II. (cp. fyrir, acc., C. IX), in a neg. or priv. sense; a few words occur even in the earliest poems, laws, and writers, e. g. for-að, -átta, -dæða, -nám, -næmi, -sending, -sköp, -verk, -veðja, -viða, -vitni, -ynja, -yrtir; those words at least seem to be original and vernacular: at a later time more words of the same kind crept in:
    1. as early as writers of the 13th and 14th centuries, e. g. for-boð, -bænir, -djarfa, -dæma (fyrir-dæma), -taka (fyrir-taka), -þóttr; fyrir-bjóða, -fara, -göra, -koma, -kunna, -líta, -muna, -mæla, -vega, -verða.
    2. introduced in some words at the time of the Reformation through Luther’s Bible and German hymns, and still later in many more through Danish, e. g. for-brjóta, -drífa, -láta, -líkast, -merkja, -nema, -sorga, -sóma, -standa, -svara, -þénusta, and several others; many of these, however, are not truly naturalised, being chiefly used in eccl. writings:—it is curious that if the pronoun be placed after the verb (which is the vernacular use in Icel.) the sense is in many cases reversed; thus, fyrir-koma, to destroy, but koma e-u fyrir can only mean to arrange; so also fyrir-mæla, to curse, and mæla fyrir, to speak for; for-bænir, but biðja fyrir e-m, etc.; in the latter case the sense is good and positive, in the former bad and negative; this seems to prove clearly that these compds are due to foreign influence.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > FYRIR

  • 13 λόγος

    λόγος, ου, ὁ (verbal noun of λέγω in the sense ‘pick’; Hom.+).
    ① a communication whereby the mind finds expression, word
    ⓐ of utterance, chiefly oral.
    α. as expression, word (oratorical ability plus exceptional performance were distinguishing marks in Hellenic society, hence the frequent association of λ. and ἔργον ‘deed’; a sim. formulation as early as Il. 9, 443 μύθων τε ῥητῆρʼ ἔμεναι πρηκτῆρά τε ἔργων; Polystrat. p. 33 μὴ λόγῳ μόνον ἀλλʼ ἔργω; Just., A II, 4, 2 ἢ λόγῳ ἢ ἔργῳ and D. 35, 7 λόγον ἢ πρᾶξιν) δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ κ. λόγῳ, i.e. an exceptional personage Lk 24:19; pl. of Moses Ac 7:22 (the contrast expressed w. a verb Choix 20, 6–8 ποιεῖ ἀγαθὸν ὄτι δύναται καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ of Apollordorus, a benefactor in Cyzicus, a flourishing city in Phrygia; sim. New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 8f πολιτευόμενος … λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ; cp. IKourion 32, 8; without contrast Diod S 13, 101, 3 ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς; for sim. constructions using λέγω and πράσσω s. Danker, Benefactor 339–43). Cp. Ro 15:18; 2 Cor 10:11; Col 3:17; 2 Th 2:17; Hb 13:21 v.l.; 1J 3:18 (cp. Theognis 1, 87f Diehl3 μή μʼ ἔπεσιν μὲν στέργε κτλ.—For the contrast λόγῳ … ἀληθείᾳ cp. Diod S 13, 4, 1). In contrast to a sinful deed we also have the λόγος ἁμαρτίας sinful word Judaicon 172, 9. W. γνῶσις: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5. ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ, ἀλλʼ οὐ τῇ γνώσει 2 Cor 11:6. (Opp. δύναμις ‘revelation of power’) 1 Cor 4:19, 20. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Th 1:5 (cp. Ar. 13, 7 of mythical accounts οὐδέν εἰσιν εἰ μὴ μόνον λόγοι ‘they’re nothing but words’). W. ἐπιστολή: 2 Th 2:2, 15. W. ἀναστροφή: 1 Ti 4:12; 1 Pt 3:1b. Opp. ‘be silent’: IRo 2:1.—μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ just say the word Mt 8:8; cp. Lk 7:7 (Ath. 17, 1 ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; 29, 2; Phalaris, Ep. 121, 1 λόγῳ λέγειν; cp. schol. on Pla. 341a ἐν λόγῳ μόνον εἰπεῖν). οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον no one was able to answer him a (single) word Mt 22:46; cp. 15:23 (cp. TestAbr A 16 p. 98, 11 [Stone p. 44] οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λόγον).— The (mighty) word (of one who performs miracles) ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Mt 8:16 (a rare use of λ. as ‘single utterance’, s. L-S-J-M s.v. VII).—διὰ λόγου by word of mouth (opp. ‘by letter’) Ac 15:27.—In the textually uncertain pass. Ac 20:24 the text as it stands in N., οὐδενὸς λόγου (v.l. λόγον) ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν, may well mean: I do not consider my life worth a single word (cp. λόγου ἄξιον [ἄξιος 1a] and our ‘worth mention’; s. Conzelmann ad loc.).
    β. The expression may take on a variety of formulations or topical nuances: what you say Mt 5:37; statement (PGM 4, 334) Lk 20:20; question (Sext. Emp., Math. 8, 295; 9, 133; Diog. L. 2, 116) ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς λόγον I will ask you a question (cp. TestJob 36:5; GrBar 5:1; ApcSed 13:6; Jos., Ant. 12, 99) Mt 21:24; cp. Mk 11:29; Lk 20:3; prayer (PGM 1, 25; 4, 90; 179; 230 al.; 5, 180; 196 al.) Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39. ἡγούμενος τοῦ λ. principal speaker Ac 14:12. W. epexeget. gen. λ. παρακλήσεως 13:15. W. κήρυγμα our manner of presentation and our proclamation 1 Cor 2:4a (but s. comm.). (W. διδασκαλία) preaching 1 Ti 5:17; prophecy (Biogr. p. 364 [Pythia]) J 2:22; 18:32. Command (Aeschyl., Pers. 363) Lk 4:36; 2 Pt 3:5, 7; via a letter 2 Th 3:14. Report, story (X., An. 1, 4, 7; Diod S 3, 40, 9; 19, 110, 1 λ. διαδιδόναι=spread a report; Appian, Iber. 80 §346, Maced. 4 §1 [both=rumor]; Diod S 32, 15, 3 ἦλθεν ὁ λ. ἐπί τινα=the report came to someone; Arrian, Anab. 7, 22, 1 λόγος λέγεται τοιόσδε=a story is told like this, Ind. 9, 2; Diod S 3, 18, 3 λ.=story, account; Jos., Ant. 19, 132; Tat. 27, 2 τοῦ καθʼ Ἡρακλέα λόγου) Mt 28:15; Mk 1:45; Lk 5:15 (λ. περί τινος as X., An. 6, 6, 13; Jos., Ant. 19, 127) 7:17; J 21:23. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τ. ἐκκλησίας the report came to the ears of the assembly in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. λόγον ἔχειν σοφίας have the appearance of wisdom, pass for wisdom Col 2:23 (cp. Pla., Epinomis 987b ἔχει λόγον; Demosth., C. Lept. 462 [20, 18] λόγον τινʼ ἔχον; but mng. 2f is possible). Proverb (Pla., Phdr. 17, 240c, Symp. 18, 195b, Gorg. 54, 499c, Leg. 6, 5, 757a; Socrat., Ep. 22, 1) J 4:37 (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 13, 7 ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ὁ λ. foll. by a proverb). Proclamation, instruction, teaching, message Lk 4:32; 10:39; J 4:41; 17:20; Ac 2:41; 4:4; 10:44; 20:7; 1 Cor 1:17; 2:1. In Ac18:15 ζητήματα περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου the sense appears to be someth. like this: controversial issues involving disputes about words and your way of life with λ. prob. referring to the presentation of controversial subjects, which in turn arouses heated ζητήματα debates. λόγος σοφίας proclamation of wisdom, speaking wisely 1 Cor 12:8a (Ps.-Phoc. 129 τῆς θεοπνεύστου σοφίης λ.); corresp. λ. γνώσεως vs. 8b. Cp. 14:9; 15:2; 2 Cor 1:18; 6:7; 10:10. λ. μαρτυρίας word of witness Rv 12:11. ὁ κατὰ τ. διδαχὴν πιστὸς λ. the message of faith, corresponding to the teaching Tit 1:9; the opp. 2 Ti 2:17. A speech (Aristot. p. 14b, 2; Diod S 40, 5a) διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ in a long speech Ac 15:32; cp. 20:2. λ. κολακείας flattering speech 1 Th 2:5. Speaking gener. 2 Cor 8:7; Eph 6:19; Col 4:6; D 2:5. ἐν λόγῳ πταίειν make a mistake in what one says Js 3:2.—Of God’s word, command, commission (LXX; ParJer 5:19 κατηχῆσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν λόγον; SyrBar 13:2; ApcSed 14:10; Just., D. 84, 2; Ael. Aristid. hears a ἱερὸς λ. at night fr. a god: 28, 116 K.=49, p. 529 D.; Sextus 24) ἠκυρώσατε τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 15:6 (v.l. νόμον, ἐντολήν); cp. Mk 7:13.—J 5:38; 8:55; 10:35; Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6). Of God’s promise Ro 9:6, 9 (but these two vss., and Gal 5:14 below, prob. fit better under 2a), 28 (Is 10:22f). Cp. Hb 2:2; 4:2 (s. ἀκοή 4b); 7:28; 12:19. For B 15:1 see 1aδ. The whole law (as the expr. εἴ τι ἑτέρα ἐντολή indicates not limited to a narrow list of commandments), acc. to Ro 13:9. In what is prob. a play on words (s. 2a and b), Gal 5:14 (s. 2a below) is summed up in the λόγος as expressed in Lev 19:18.—That which God has created ἁγιάζεται διὰ λόγου θεοῦ 1 Ti 4:5; in line w. the context, this hardly refers to God’s creative word (so SibOr 3, 20; PtK 2; πάντα γὰρ λόγῳ ποιήσας ὁ θεός Theoph. Ant. 2, 18 [144, 8]), but to table prayers which use biblical expressions. The divine word as judge of thoughts Hb 4:12. τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 17:17; cp. 19:9.—Of the divine revelation through Christ and his messengers (Just., A I, 61, 9 λόγον … παρὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐμάθομεν τοῦτον) θεὸς ἐφανέρωσεν τὸν λ. αὐτοῦ ἐν κηρύγματι Tit 1:3. δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λ. σου J 17:14; cp. vss. 6, 17; 1J 1:10; 2:14. ἵνα μὴ ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ βλασφημῆται Tit 2:5. The apostles and other preachers, w. ref. to the λόγος of God, are said to: λαλεῖν Ac 4:29, 31; 13:46; Phil 1:14; Hb 13:7; καταγγέλλειν Ac 13:5; 17:13; διδάσκειν 18:11; μαρτυρεῖν Rv 1:2. Of their hearers it is said: τὸν λ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούειν Ac 13:7; δέχεσθαι 8:14; 11:1. Of the λ. τοῦ θεοῦ itself we read: ηὔξανεν Ac 6:7; 12:24; 19:20; οὐ δέδεται 2 Ti 2:9. In these places and many others ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ is simply the Christian message, the gospel: Lk 5:1; 8:11, 21; 11:28 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 1, 20 μὴ μόνον ἀκουόντων ἀλλὰ πασχόντων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων=let the message have its effect on oneself); Ac 6:2 (s. καταλείπω 7c; for prob. commercial metaph. s. 2a below); 13:44 v.l. (for κυρίου); 16:32 v.l.; 1 Cor 14:36; 2 Cor 2:17; 4:2; Col 1:25; 1 Pt 1:23; Rv 1:9; 6:9; 20:4; IPhld 11:1. Cp. 1 Th 2:13ab; 1J 2:5.—Since this ‘divine word’ is brought to humanity through Christ, his word can be used in the same sense: ὁ λόγος μου J 5:24; cp. 8:31, 37, 43, 51f; 12:48; 14:23f; 15:3, 20b; Rv 3:8. ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Col 3:16; cp. Hb 6:1. ὁ λ. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 8:25; 12:24 v.l.; 13:44, 48f; 14:25 v.l.; 15:35, 36; 16:32 (cp. λ. θεοῦ); 19:10; 1 Th 1:8; 2 Th 3:1. Pl. Mk 8:38 (Lk 9:26); 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Lk 24:44; s. also 1aδ.—Or it is called simply ὁ λόγος=the ‘Word’, for no misunderstanding would be possible among Christians: Mt 13:20–23; Mk 2:2; 4:14–20, 33; 8:32 (s. 1aε below); 16:20; Lk 1:2; 8:12f, 15; Ac 6:4; 8:4; 10:36 (on the syntax s. FNeirynck, ETL 60, ’84, 118–23); 11:19; 14:25 (cp. λ. κυρίου above); 16:6; 17:11; 18:5; Gal 6:6; Phil 1:14; Col 4:3; 1 Th 1:6; 2 Ti 4:2; Js 1:21ff; 1 Pt 2:8; 3:1; 1J 2:7; AcPl Ha 7, 6 (so also Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 2, 3).—Somet. the ‘Word’ is more closely defined by a gen.: ὁ λ. τῆς βασιλείας the word of the reign/rule (of God) Mt 13:19. τῆς σωτηρίας Ac 13:26. τῆς καταλλαγῆς 2 Cor 5:19. τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. δικαιοσύνης (q.v. 3a) Hb 5:13. ζωῆς Phil 2:16. (τῆς) ἀληθείας (Theoph. Ant. 3, 4 [p. 212, 2]; cp. περὶ ἀληθείας Hippol., Ref. 10, 6, 1) Eph 1:13; Col 1:5; 2 Ti 2:15; Js 1:18; AcPl Ha 8, 8 (Just., D. 121, 2). τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) Ac 14:3; 20:32. (Differently the pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. χάριτος gracious words Lk 4:22; cp. Marcellinus, Vi. Thu. 57 Hude λόγοι εἰρωνείας.) ὁ λ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ac 15:7; ὁ τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ λ. MPol 10:1. In Rv 3:10 the gospel is described by the ‘One who has the key of David’ as ὁ λ. τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου my word of endurance (W-S. §30, 12c). λ. τῶν ὑ[πο]μονῶν AcPl Ha 6, 11. παρελάβετε τὸν λ. ὅτι AcPl Ha 8, 25.—The pastoral letters favor the expr. πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (sc. ἐστίν, and s. πιστός 1b) 1 Ti 1:15; 3:1; 4:9; 2 Ti 2:11; Tit 3:8; cp. Rv 21:5; 22:6. λ. ὑγιής sound preaching Tit 2:8; cp. the pl. ὑγιαίνοντες λόγοι 2 Ti 1:13 (on medicinal use of words for the mind or soul s. VLeinieks, The City of Dionysos ’96, 115–22, on Eur.).—The pl. is also used gener. of Christian teachings, the words of the gospel Lk 1:4 (s. κατηχέω 2a); 1 Th 4:18. οἱ λ. τῆς πίστεως 1 Ti 4:6. On λόγοι κυριακοί for λόγια κυριακά in the title of the Papias document s. ἐξήγησις 2.—JSchniewind, Die Begriffe Wort und Evangelium bei Pls, diss. Bonn 1910; RAsting (εὐαγγέλιον, end).
    γ. of an individual declaration or remark: assertion, declaration, speech ἀκούσαντες τὸν λ. when they heard the statement Mt 15:12; cp. 19:11, 22; 22:15; Mk 5:36. διὰ τοῦτον τὸν λ. because of this statement of yours 7:29 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 29 [Stone p. 38] τὸν λ. τοῦτον; ApcMos 25 εἰς τὸν λόγον σου κρινῶ σε). Cp. 10:22; 12:13; Lk 1:29; 22:61 v.l. (for ῥήματος); J 4:39, 50; 6:60; 7:36, 40 v.l.; 15:20a; 18:9; 19:8; Ac 6:5; 7:29; 20:38; 22:22; 1 Th 4:15. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου whoever utters a (defamatory) word against the Son of Humanity Mt 12:32 (λ. εἰπεῖν κατά τινος as Jos., Ant. 15, 81); cp. Lk 12:10. λόγος σαπρός unwholesome talk Eph 4:29. λόγον ποιεῖσθαι make a speech Ac 11:2 D (cp. Hyperid. 3, 20; Jos., Ant. 11, 86).
    δ. the pl. (οἱ) λόγοι is used, on the one hand, of words uttered on various occasions, of speeches or instruction given here and there by humans or transcendent beings (TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 19 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 4, 264; Just., D. 100, 3) ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου δικαιωθήσῃ (καταδικασθήσῃ) Mt 12:37ab; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 21:33; Ac 2:40; 7:22 (ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ. On the word-deed pair cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 6 the λόγοι and ἔργα of Diogenes; s. α above). οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten commandments (Ex 34:28; Dt 10:4; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 168, Decal. 32; Jos., Ant. 3, 138; cp. 91f; Did., Gen. 36, 10) B 15:1. Ac 15:24; 20:35; 1 Cor 2:4b, 13; 14:19ab; κενοὶ λ. Eph 5:6; AcPl Ox 6, 13 (cp. Aa 1, 241, 14); Dg 8:2; πλαστοὶ λ. 2 Pt 2:3. λ. πονηροί 3J 10.—Also of words and exprs. that form a unity, whether it be connected discourse (Jos., Ant. 15, 126; Just., A II, 12, 6, D. 11, 5; 81, 3 al.), a conversation, or parts of one and the same teaching, or expositions on the same subject (Diod S 16, 2, 3 μετέσχε τῶν Πυθαγορίων λόγων; Dio Chrys. 37 [54], 1; Ael. Aristid. 50, 55 K.=26 p. 519 D.: οἱ Πλάτωνος λόγοι; PsSol 17:43 [words of the Messiah]; AscIs 3:12 οἱ λόγοι τοῦ Βελχειρά) πᾶς ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:24; cp. vss. 26, 28; 10:14; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 10:24; Lk 1:20; 6:47; 9:28, 44. ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς he questioned him at some length 23:9. τίνες οἱ λ. οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε; what is this conversation that you are holding? 24:17; J 7:40 (s. γ); 10:19; J 14:24a; 19:13; Ac 2:22; 5:5, 24; 16:36; 2 Ti 4:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 46:7. λόγοις φθοριμαίοις AcPlCor 1:2.
    ε. the subject under discussion, matter, thing gener. (Theognis 1055 Diehl; Hdt. 8, 65 μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπῃς. Cp. Hebr. דָּבָר) τὸν λ. ἐκράτησαν they took up the subject Mk 9:10; cp. Mt. 21:24 (s. 1aβ beg.). οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ you have no share in this matter Ac 8:21. ἰδεῖν περὶ τ. λόγου τούτου look into this matter 15:6. ἔχειν πρός τινα λόγον have a complaint against someone (cp. Demosth. 35, 55 ἐμοὶ πρὸς τούτους ὁ λόγος; PIand 16, 3 δίκαιον λόγον ἔχει πρὸς σέ) 19:38. παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (2d is also prob.).—Perh. also Mk 8:32 he discussed the subject quite freely (but s. 1aβ above).
    ⓑ of literary or oratorical productions: of the separate books of a work (Hdt. 5, 36 ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τ. λόγων; Pla., Parmen. 2, 127d ὁ πρῶτος λόγος; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 1 ὁ μὲν πρότερος λόγος ἦν ἡμῖν, ὦ Θεόδοτε, περὶ τοῦ …) treatise Ac 1:1 (s. on the prologue to Ac: AHilgenfeld, ZWT 41, 1898, 619ff; AGercke, Her 29, 1894, 373ff; RLaqueur, Her 46, 1911, 161ff; Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; JCreed, JTS 35, ’34, 176–82; Goodsp., Probs. 119–21). Παπίας … πέντε λόγους κυριακῶν λογίων ἔγραψεν Papias (11:1; cp. 3:1 e; 11:2; 12:2).—περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11. Hb is described as ὁ λ. τῆς παρακλήσεως a word of exhortation (in literary form) 13:22. Of writings that are part of Holy Scripture ὁ λ. Ἠσαί̈ου J 12:38. ὁ λ. ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γεγραμμένος 15:25; ὁ προφητικὸς λ. 2 Pt 1:19; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.); AcPl Ha 8, 27/BMM recto 35 (Just., D. 77, 2 al.). ὁ ἅγιος λ. the holy word 1 Cl 56:3. ὁ λ. ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 Cor 15:54 (Is 25:8 and Hos 13:14 follow). Pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. προφητῶν Ac 15:15. ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαί̈ου Lk 3:4 (Pla., 7th Epistle 335a πείθεσθαι ἀεὶ χρὴ τοῖς παλαιοῖς καὶ ἱεροῖς λόγοις; TestJob 1:1 βίβλος λόγων Ἰώβ; ParJer 9:32 v.l. τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν λόγων Ἱερεμίου; ApcEsdr 1:1 καὶ ἀποκάλυψις τοῦ … Ἐσδράμ; ApcSed prol.; Just., D. 72, 3f).—Of the content of Rv: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων τ. λόγους τῆς προφητείας 1:3. οἱ λόγοι (τ. προφητείας) τ. βιβλίου τούτου 22:7, 9f, 18f.
    ② computation, reckoning
    ⓐ a formal accounting, esp. of one’s actions, and freq. with fig. extension of commercial terminology account, accounts, reckoning λόγον δοῦναι (Hdt. 8, 100; X., Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Diod S 3, 46, 4; SIG 1099, 16; BGU 164, 21; Jos., Ant. 16, 120; Just., D. 115, 6) give account, make an accounting ἕκαστος περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λόγον δώσει τ. θεῷ Ro 14:12. Also λ. ἀποδοῦναι abs. (Just., D. 116, 1 al.; Diod S 16, 56, 4; 19, 9, 4) Hb 13:17. τινί to someone (Diod S 16, 27, 4; Plut., Alcib. 7, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 2; SIG 631, 13 τᾷ πόλει; 2 Ch 34:28; Da 6:3 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 209) τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 Pt 4:5. τινὸς of someth. (SIG 1044, 46; 1105, 10 τοῦ ἀναλώματος; Jos., Ant. 19, 307) Lk 16:2 (here λ. w. the art.; on the subject of undergoing an audit cp. Aeschin. 3, 22). Likew. περί τινος (Diod S 18, 60, 2 δοὺς αὑτῷ περὶ τούτων λόγον=taking account [considering] with himself; BGU 98, 25 περὶ τούτου) Mt 12:36; Ac 19:40. ὑπέρ τινος concerning someone Hv 3, 9, 10.—αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί τινος call someone to account for someth. 1 Pt 3:15 (cp. Pla., Pol. 285e; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 30; Apc4Esdr Fgm. b ἕκαστος ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔργου τὸν λόγον ἀπαιτηθήσεται; Just., A I, 17, 4. For another perspective s. d below.).—Of banking responsibility ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ (PStras 72, 10 [III A.D.] ὁ τῶν θεῶν λ.; PHerm 108 [III A.D.] λ. τοῦ Σαραπείου) in wordplay Ac 6:2 (w. τράπεζα q.v. 1c); s. also 1aβ.—Of a ledger heading (POxy 1333 [II/III A.D.] δὸς αὐτῳ λόγῳ θεωρικῶν=credit him under ‘festivals’; for others s. Preisig., Wörterbuch s.v. λ. 14; s. also Fachwörter 119) Ro 9:6 (the point is that God’s ‘list’ of Israelites is accurate; on ἐκπίπτω in the sense ‘is not deficient’ s. s.v. 4); vs. 9 (the ‘count’ is subsumed by metonymy in divine promise); Gal 5:14 (all moral obligations come under one ‘entry’: ‘you shall love your neighbor as yourself’; for commercial association of ἀναλίσκω vs. 15, which rounds out the wordplay, s. s.v.). The contexts of these three passages suggest strong probability for commercial associations; for another view s. 1aβ.
    ⓑ settlement (of an account) (εἰς λόγον commercial t.t. ‘in settlement of an account’ POxy 275, 19; 21) εἰς λόγον δόσεως κ. λήμψεως in settlement of a mutual account (lit., ‘of giving and receiving’, ‘of debit and credit’) Phil 4:15 (cp. Plut., Mor. 11b λόγον δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν; a parallel formulation POxy 1134,10 [421 A.D.] λ. λήμματος καὶ ἐξοδιασμοῦ=ledger of income and expenditures); for the linked accounting terms δόσις and λήμψις s. PCairMasp 151, 208 [VI A.D.]. The same ideas are in the background of εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν credited to your account vs 17.—συναίρειν λόγον settle accounts (BGU 775, 18f. The mid. in the same mng. PFay109, 6 [I A.D.]; POxy 113, 27f.—Dssm., LO 94 [LAE 118f]) μετά τινος Mt 18:23; 25:19.
    ⓒ reflection, respect, regard εἰς λόγον τινός with regard to, for the sake of (Thu. 3, 46, 4; Demosth. 19, 142 εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον; Polyb. 11, 28, 8; Ath. 31, 1; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 743 D.: εἰς δεινότητος λ.) εἰς λ. τιμῆς IPhld 11:2. εἰς λ. θεοῦ ISm 10:1.
    ⓓ reason for or cause of someth., reason, ground, motive (Just., D. 94, 3 δότε μοι λόγον, ὅτου χάριν … ; Ath. 30, 3 τὶς γὰρ … λόγος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 18 ἐκ τούτου τ. λόγου; Appian, Hann. 29 §126 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 155) τίνι λόγω; for what reason? Ac 10:29 (cp. Pla., Gorg. 512c τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; Appian, Mithrid. 57 §232 τίνι λόγῳ;). λόγον περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Pt 3:15 (but s. a above); κατὰ λόγον Ac 18:14 (s. κατά B 5bβ). παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (though 1aε is also poss.).
    ⓔ πρὸς ὸ̔ν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος (ἐστίν) with whom we have to do (i.e. to reckon) (Dio Chrys. 31, 123; other exx. in FBleek, Hb II/1, 1836, 590ff), in his capacity as judge (Libanius, Legat. Ulixis [=Declamatio IV] 2 F. τοῖς δὲ ἀδίκως ἀποκτενοῦσι καὶ πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ὁ λόγος γίγνεται) Hb 4:13. οὐ πρὸς σάρκα ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ πρὸς θεόν he has to do not with flesh, but with God IMg 3:2.
    ⓕ In Col 2:23 (s. 1aβ) λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας may= make a case for wisdom (cp. λόγος ἡμῖν οὐδείς Plut., Mor. 870b).
    ③ the independent personified expression of God, the Logos. Our lit. shows traces of a way of thinking that was widespread in contemporary syncretism, as well as in Jewish wisdom lit. and Philo, the most prominent feature of which is the concept of the Logos, the independent, personified ‘Word’ (of God): GJs 11:2 (word of the angel to Mary) συνλήμψῃ ἐκ Λόγου αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ πάντων Δεσπότου). J 1:1abc, 14 (cp. Just., A I, 23, 2; Mel., P. 9, 61 and oft. by all apolog., exc.. Ar.). It is the distinctive teaching of the Fourth Gospel that this divine ‘Word’ took on human form in a historical person, that is, in Jesus (s. RSeeberg, Festgabe für AvHarnack ’21, 263–81.—Λόγος w. ζωή in gnostic speculation: Iren.1, 1, 1 [Harv. 1, 10, 4]; Aelian, VH 4, 20 ἐκάλουν τὸν Πρωταγόραν Λόγον. Similarly Favorinus [II A.D.]: Vorsokr. 80 A 1 ln. 22 [in Diog. L. 9, 50] of Democritus: ἐκαλεῖτο Σοφία. Equating a divinity with an abstraction that she personifies: Artem. 5, 18 φρόνησις εἶναι νομίζεται ἡ θεός [Athena]). Cp. 1J 1:1; Rv 19:13. εἷς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰ. Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος, ἀπὸ σιγῆς προελθών there is one God, who has revealed himself through Jesus Christ his Son, who is his ‘Word’ proceeding from silence (i.e., without an oral pronouncement: in a transcendent manner) IMg 8:2 (s. σιγή). The Lord as νόμος κ. λόγος PtK 1. Cp. Dg 11:2, 3, 7, 8; 12:9.—HClavier, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 81–93: the Alexandrian eternal λόγος is also implied in Hb 4:12; 13:7.—S. also the ‘Comma Johanneum’ (to the bibliography in RGG3 I, ’54 [HGreeven] add AJülicher, GGA 1905, 930–35; AvHarnack, SBBerlAk 1915, 572f [=Studien I ’31, 151f]; MMeinertz, Einl. in d. NT4 ’33, 309–11; AGreiff, TQ 114, ’33, 465–80; CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46; WThiele, ZNW 50, ’59, 61–73) ὁ πατήρ, ὁ λόγος καὶ τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 1J 5:7 v.l. (s. N. app.; Borger, TRu 52, ’87, 57f). (Such interpolations were not unheard of. According to Diog. L. 1, 48 some people maintain that Solon inserted the verse mentioning the Athenians after Il. 2, 557.—τῆς τριάδος, τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς σοφίας αὐτοῦ Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 19].)—On the Logos: EZeller, D. Philosophie der Griechen III 24 1903, 417–34; MHeinze, D. Lehre v. Logos in d. griech. Philosophie 1872; PWendland, Philo u. d. kynisch-stoische Diatribe (Beiträge z. Gesch. der griech. Philosophie u. Religion by Wendl. and OKern 1895, 1–75); AAall, Gesch. d. Logosidee 1896, 1899; MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48f, I 482; 490 (index); LDürr, D. Wertung des göttl. Wortes im AT u. im ant. Orient ’38 (§9 of the Joh. Logos); EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1907, 83–111; (2 ’25); JLebreton, Les théories du Logos au début de l’ère chrétienne 1907; ESchwartz, NGG 1908, 537–56; GVos, The Range of the Logos-Title in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel: PTR 11, 1913, 365–419; 557–602; RHarris, The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel 1917, Athena, Sophia and the Logos: BJRL 7, 1, 1922 p. 56–72; M-JLagrange, Vers le Logos de S. Jean: RB 32, 1923, 161–84, Le Logos de Philon: ibid. 321–71; HLeisegang, Logos: Pauly-W. XIII 1926, 1035–81; TGlasson, Heraclitus’ Alleged Logos Doctr., JTS 3, ’52, 231–38.—NWeinstein, Z. Genesis d. Agada 1901, 29–90; Billerb. II 302–33.—Rtzst., Zwei religionsgeschichtl. Fragen 1901, 47–132, Mysterienrel.3 1927, 428 index; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 304ff; 316f; JKroll, D. Lehren d. Hermes Trismegistos1914, 418 index.—RBultmann, D. religionsgesch. Hintergrund des Prol. z. Joh.: HGunkel Festschr., 1923, II 1–26, Comm. ’41, 5ff; AAlexander, The Johannine Doctrine of the Logos: ET 36, 1925, 394–99; 467–72; (Rtzst. and) HSchaeder, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, 306–37; 350; GAvdBerghvanEysinga, In den beginne was de Logos: NThT 23, ’34, 105–23; JDillersberger, Das Wort von Logos ’35; RBury, The 4th Gosp. and the Logos-Doctrine ’40; EMay, CBQ 8, ’46, 438–47; GKnight, From Moses to Paul ’49, 120–29. TW IV 76–89; 126–40 (on this s. SLyonnet, Biblica 26, ’45, 126–31); CStange, ZST 21, ’50, 120–41; MBoismard, Le Prologue de St. Jean ’53; HLangkammer, BZ 9, ’65, 91–94; HRinggren, Word and Wisdom [hypostatization in Near East] ’47; WEltester, Haenchen Festschr., ’64, 109–34; HWeiss, Untersuchungen zur Kosmologie etc., TU 97, ’66, 216–82; MRissi, Die Logoslieder im Prolog des vierten Evangeliums, TZ 31, ’75, 321–36; HLausberg, NAWG, Ph. ’87, 1 pp. 1–7.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. λέγω B 1. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λόγος

  • 14 μυστήριον

    μυστήριον, ου, τό ‘secret, secret rite, secret teaching, mystery’ a relig. t.t. (predom. pl.) applied in the Gr-Rom. world mostly to the mysteries w. their secret teachings, relig. and political in nature, concealed within many strange customs and ceremonies. The principal rites remain unknown because of a reluctance in antiquity to divulge them (Trag.+; Hdt. 2, 51, 2; Diod S 1, 29, 3; 3, 63, 2; Socrat., Ep. 27, 3; Cornutus 28 p. 56, 22; 57, 4; Alciphron 3, 26, 1; OGI 331, 54; 528, 13; 721, 2, SIG s. index; Sb 7567, 9 [III A.D.]; PGM 1, 131; 4, 719ff; 2477 τὰ ἱερὰ μ. ἀνθρώποις εἰς γνῶσιν; 5, 110; 12, 331; 13, 128 τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ θεοῦ. Only the perfected gnostic is τῶν μυστηρίων ἀκροατής Hippol., Ref. 5, 8, 29.—OKern, D. griech. Mysterien d. klass. Zeit 1927; WOtto, D. Sinn der eleusin. Myst. ’40; MNilsson, The Dionysiac Mysteries of the Hell. and Rom. Age, ’57; Kl. Pauly III 1533–42; WBurkert, Antike Mysterien ’90). Also LXX and other versions of the OT use the word, as well as En (of the heavenly secret) and numerous pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph. (C. Ap. 2, 189, 266), apolog. (exc. Ar.); it is a loanw. in rabb. Our lit. uses μ. in ref. to the transcendent activity of God and its impact on God’s people.
    ① the unmanifested or private counsel of God, (God’s) secret, the secret thoughts, plans, and dispensations of God (SJCh 78, 9; τὸ μ. τῆς μοναρχίας τῆς κατὰ τὸν θεόν Theoph. Ant. 2, 28 [p. 166, 17]) which are hidden fr. human reason, as well as fr. all other comprehension below the divine level, and await either fulfillment or revelation to those for whom they are intended (the divine Logos as διδάσκαλος θείων μυστηρίων Orig., C. Cels. 3, 62, 9: the constellations as δεῖγμα καὶ τύπον … μεγάλου μυστηρίου Hippol. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 7]; Abraham is τῶν θείων … μέτοχος μυστηρίων Did., Gen. 213, 20).
    ⓐ In the gospels μ. is found only in one context, where Jesus says to the disciples who have asked for an explanation of the parable(s) ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς βασιλείας τ. θεοῦ Mk 4:11; the synopt. parallels have the pl. Mt 13:11 (LCerfaux, NTS 2, ’55/56, 238–49); Lk 8:10.—WWrede, D. Messiasgeh. in den Evv. 1901; HEbeling, D. Messiasgeh. u. d. Botschaft des Mc-Evangelisten ’39; NJohansson, SvTK 16, ’40, 3–38; OPiper, Interpretation 1, ’47, 183–200; RArida, St Vladimar Theol. Qtly 38, ’94, 211–34 (patristic exegesis Mk 4:10–12 par.).
    ⓑ The Pauline lit. has μ. in 21 places. A secret or mystery, too profound for human ingenuity, is God’s reason for the partial hardening of Israel’s heart Ro 11:25 or the transformation of the surviving Christians at the Parousia 1 Cor 15:51. Even Christ, who was understood by so few, is God’s secret or mystery Col 2:2, hidden ages ago 1:26 (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 16 τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ κεκρυμμένον μυστήριον μέχρι τῆσδε τῆς ἡμέρας), but now gloriously revealed among the gentiles vs. 27, to whom the secret of Christ, i.e. his relevance for them, is proclaimed, 4:3 (CMitton, ET 60, ’48/49, 320f). Cp. Ro 16:25; 1 Cor 2:1 (cp. Just., D. 91, 1; 131, 2 al. μ. τοῦ σταυροῦ; 74, 3 τὸ σωτήριον τοῦτο μ., τοῦτʼ ἔστι τὸ πάθος τοῦ χριστοῦ). The pl. is used to denote Christian preaching by the apostles and teachers in the expr. οἰκονόμοι μυστηρίων θεοῦ 1 Cor 4:1 (Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 23, 104 calls the teachings of Pyth. θεῖα μυστήρια). Not all Christians are capable of understanding all the mysteries. The one who speaks in tongues πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια utters secret truths in the Spirit which the person alone shares w. God, and which others, even Christians, do not understand 1 Cor 14:2. Therefore the possession of all mysteries is a great joy 13:2 (Just., D. 44, 2). And the spirit-filled apostle can say of the highest stage of Christian knowledge, revealed only to the τέλειοι: λαλοῦμεν θεοῦ σοφίαν ἐν μυστηρίῳ we impart the wisdom of God in the form of a mystery (ἐν μυστηρίῳ=in a mysterious manner [Laud. Therap. 11] or =secretly, so that no unauthorized person would learn of it [cp. Cyr. of Scyth. p. 90, 14 ἐν μυστηρίῳ λέγει]) 2:7 (AKlöpper, ZWT 47, 1905, 525–45).—Eph, for which (as well as for Col) μ. is a predominant concept, sees the μ. τοῦ θελήματος αὐτοῦ (sc. θεοῦ) 1:9 or μ. τ. Χριστοῦ 3:4 or μ. τ. εὐαγγελίου 6:19 in acceptance of the gentiles as Christians 3:3ff, 9ff. A unique great mystery is revealed 5:32, where the relation betw. Christ and the Christian community or church is spoken of on the basis of Gen 2:24 (cp. the interpretation of the sun as symbol of God, Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 8], and s. WKnox, St. Paul and the Church of the Gentiles, ’39, 183f; 227f; WBieder, TZ 11, ’55, 329–43).
    ⓒ In Rv μ. is used in ref. to the mysterious things portrayed there. The whole content of the book appears as τὸ μ. τοῦ θεοῦ 10:7. Also τὸ μ. τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων 1:20; τὸ μ. τῆς γυναικός 17:7, cp. vs. 5, where in each case μ. may mean allegorical significance (so BEaston, Pastoral Epistles ’47, 215).
    ② that which transcends normal understanding, transcendent/ultimate reality, secret, with focus on Israelite/Christian experience.
    ⓐ 1 Ti uses μ. as a formula: τὸ μ. τῆς πίστεως is simply faith 3:9. τὸ τ. εὐσεβείας μ. the secret of (our) piety vs. 16.—τὸ μ. τῆς ἀνομίας 2 Th 2:7 s. ἀνομία 1 (Jos., Bell. 1, 470 calls the life of Antipater κακίας μυστήριον because of his baseness practiced in secret. Cp. also SibOr 8, 58 τὰ πλάνης μυστήρια; 56).—PFurfey, CBQ 8, ’46, 179–91.
    ⓑ in Ign.: the death and resurrection of Jesus as μ. IMg 9:1 (τὸ περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως μ. Orig., C. Cels. 1, 7, 9). The virginity of Mary, her childbearing, and the Lord’s death are called τρία μ. κραυγῆς three mysteries (to be) loudly proclaimed IEph 19:1 (they are mysteries because they go so contrary to human expectation). So also of the annunciation to Mary and her conception GJs 12:2f. The deacons are οἱ διάκονοι μυστηρίων Ἰ. Χρ. ITr 2:3.
    ⓒ Quite difficult is the saying about the tried and true prophet ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας who acts in accord with the earthly mystery of (God’s) assembly D 11:11. This may refer to celibacy; the prophet lives in such a way as to correspond to the relation betw. Christ and the people of God; cp. Eph 5:32 (so Harnack, TU II 1; 2, 1884, 44ff; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen d. Geistes u. der Geister 1899, 131–38; PDrews, Hdb. z. d. ntl. Apokryphen 1904, 274ff; RKnopf, Hdb. ad loc.—Differently CTaylor, The Teaching of the Twelve Apost. 1886, 82–92; RHarris, The Teaching of the Ap. 1887; FFunk, Patr. Apostol.2 1901 ad loc.; Zahn, Forschungen III 1884, 301).
    ⓓ μ. occurs oft. in Dg: τὸ τῆς θεοσεβείας μ. the secret of (our) piety 4:6 (what Dg means by μ. is detailed in ch. 5). Likew. of Christian teaching (cp. Ps.-Phocyl. 229 and comments by Horst 260–61) πατρὸς μυστήρια 11:2; cp. vs. 5. Hence the Christian can μυστήρια θεοῦ λαλεῖν 10:7. In contrast to ἀνθρώπινα μ. 7:1. οὗ (sc. τ. θεοῦ) τὰ μυστήρια whose secret counsels 7:2 (the divine will for orderly management of the universe). Of God keeping personal counsel κατεῖχεν ἐν μυστηρίῳ … τὴν σοφὴν αὐτοῦ βουλήν 8:10.—Lghtf., St. Paul’s Ep. to the Col. and Phlm. p. 167ff; JRobinson, St. Paul’s Ep. to the Eph. 1904, 234ff; GWobbermin, Religionsgesch. Studien 1896, 144ff; EHatch, Essays on Bibl. Gk. 1889, 57ff; HvSoden, ZNW 12, 1911, 188ff; TFoster, AJT 19, 1915, 402–15; OCasel, D. Liturgie als Mysterienfeier5 1923; JSchneider, ‘Mysterion’ im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 255–78; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi ’37; KPrümm, ‘Mysterion’ v. Pls bis Orig.: ZKT 61, ’37, 391–425, Biblica 37, ’56, 135–61; RBrown, The Semitic Background of ‘Mystery’ in the NT, ’68; cp. KKuhn, NTS 7, 61, 366 for Qumran parallels to various passages in Eph and Ro; ABöhlig, Mysterion u. Wahrheit, ’68, 3–40; JFruytier, Het woord M. in de catechesen van Cyrillus van Jerusalem, ’50; ANock, Hellenistic Mysteries and Christian Sacraments, Essays on Religion and the Ancient World II, ’72, 790–820; AHarvey, The Use of Mystery Language in the Bible: JTS 31, ’80, 320–36.—DELG s.v. μύω. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μυστήριον

  • 15 פרש

    פָּרַש(b. h.) (to divide, separate, 1) (neut. verb) to go away, go aside, depart; to keep off. Yoma I, 5 הוא פוֹרֵש … פּוֹרְשִׁיןוכ׳ he turned aside and wept, and so did they. Y.Keth.I, 25d bot. ראו אותו פירש מציפורין they saw him come out of Sepphoris (so that he is presumably an inhabitant of Sepphoris); פירש מן הבתים they saw him leave one of the houses of Sepphoris. Num. R. s. 9 את פָּרַשְׁתְּ מדרךוכ׳ thou didst depart from the way (disregard the customs) of Israels daughters. Zeb.113a (play on פרשה, Num. 19:5) מקים שפּוֹרֶשֶׁת למיתהוכ׳ there where she departs for death, she shall be burnt. Y.M. Kat. I, 80b bot. (ref. to Lev. 13:45) כדי שתהא טומאה … פְּרוֹש: that the uncleanness itself may cry out …, ‘keep off; Y.Maas. Sh. V, beg. 55d; a. fr. 2) to pass, cross. Yalk. Prov. 946; Yalk. Num. 738 הספינות פּוֹרְשוֹת בים the ships make their way through the sea. 3) (act. verb) to separate, keep off. Num. R. s. 10 כשם שאדם פירש את עצמווכ׳ as a person keeps himself away (abstains) from the fruits of Orlah, so will those who misbehave towards their handmaids, be separated from the virtuous on the day of judgment.; a. fr.Part. pass. פָּרוּש, q. v. 4) (cmp. פָּרַט) to single out, specify, speak distinctly. Ib. (expl. יַפְלִא, Num. 6:2) כשיִפְרוֹש לנדורוכ׳ when he speaks out his vow, to the exclusion of him who thinks it in his heart; a. fr.Sifré Num. 24 עד שיפרוש לך … כדרך שפירשוכ׳ (Yalk. ib. 710 שיפרוט … שפרט), v. פָּרַט. Nif. נִפְרַש to be separated, kept away. Lev. R. s. 22 והן נִפְרָשִׁים מעבודה זרה and thus they will be kept away from idolatrous worship; a. e. Pi. פֵּירֵש 1) (neut. verb) to depart, withdraw; to abstain. Snh.82b היה לו … לפרוש ולא פי׳ Zimri might have withdrawn (from the woman), but he did not. Ib. a אם פ׳וכ׳ if Z. had withdrawn, and Phineas had slain him Pes.87b פ׳ מן האשה withdrew from contact with his wife. Gen. R. s. 20 שפֵּייְשָׁה היה מאדם that Eve was separated from Adam.Sabb.86b פירשה מן האיש the semen issued from a man.Pes.49b שנה ופ׳ קשהוכ׳ he that studied and gave it up, is the worst of all (in hostility to scholars); a. fr. 2) to go on a voyage; to cross the ocean (cmp. פָּלַג Hif.). Y.M. Kat. III, beg. 81c אסיר לפָרֵש לים הגדול it is forbidden to start on a sea voyage (during the festive week). Y.Yeb.XVI, 15d top עשיתי מְפָרֵשוכ׳ I was crossing Y.Meg.II, 73b top מְפָרְשֵׁי ימים voyagers on the sea; a. fr. 3) (act. verb) to separate. Gen. R. s. 22 אילו רצה המלך פֵּירְשָׁן ולא רצה המלך לפָרְשָׁן if the king desired it, he would separate them (the fighters), but the king does not wish to separate them; Yalk. ib. 38. 4) to specify, express clearly. Ib. א״א לפה לפָרְשוֹ no mouth can express it. Men.91a דמְפָרֵש when he (in making his vow) specified (‘sheep or ‘cattle), opp. בסתמא. Gen. R. s. 6 אנשי … פֵּירְשוּ איתו the men of the Great Assembly said it plainly. Snh.VII, 5 עד שיְפָרֵש השם until he mentions the Name expressly (uses the Tetragrammaton), opp. כִּינּוּי. Gitt.36a שיהו עדים מְפָרְשִׁין שמותיהן that witnesses must sign their full names; a. fr.Part. pass. מְפיֹרָש, f. מְפוֹרֶשֶׁת; pl. מְפוֹרָשִׁים, מְפוֹרָשִׁין; מְפוֹרָשוֹת. B. Kam.54b, a. fr. מה הפרט מפ׳, v. פְּרָט. B. Mets.94b שלישת בשואל מפ׳ that the third paragraph treats of a borrower, is explicitly stated (Ex. 22:13). Sot.38a, a. fr. שם המפ׳ the special Name (the Tetragrammaton), v. supra. Zeb.53a, v. סָתַם. Ḥag.22b ומה סתימות … מפ׳וכ׳ if your undefined teachings are so well-founded, how much more your explicit teachings; a. fr. 5) to explain, interpret, define. Ned.2b פתח … ומפרש ידות the Mishnah begins with kinnuyim …, and goes on explaining yadoth! Zeb.13a ואין לי לפרש and I am unable to explain (the reason of the distinction between receiving and sprinkling the blood); אני אֲפָרֵש I shall explain it. Ned.81a דבר זה … ולא פֵירְשוּהוּ עד שפֵּירְשוֹוכ׳ that question (Jer. 9:11) was asked of prophets and scholars, and they could not explain it, until the Lord himself explained it (ib. 12). Kat. 16b; Ber.18a לא פֵירְשוּ לך they did not interpret (the verse) to you; v. שָׁנָה. Gen. R. s. 31 ולא פ׳ and did not explain (of what material the serpent was to be made); Y.R. Hash. III, end, 59a; a. fr.Part. pass. as ab. Meg.3a, a. e. (ref. to Neh. 8:8) מפ׳ זה תרגים mforash means interpretation. Hithpa. הִתְפָּרֵש, Nithpa. נִתְפָּרֵש to be specified, defined; to be explained. Lev. R. s. 6 כל נביא שנתפ׳ a prophet; whose name is stated. Gen. R. l. c. בשלשה נ׳ ובאחד לא נ׳ in three places (in which עֲשֵׁה occurs) the command is specified, but in the fourth (Num. 21:8) it is not specified, v. supra. Yalk. Gen. 20 דבר שאינו מִתְפָּרֵש במקימווכ׳ a thing which is not defined in its original place but is defined i in another passage; a. e. Hif. הִפְרִיש 1) to separate; to set aside, dedicate. Yoma I, 1 מִפְרִישִׁין כהןוכ׳ they removed the high priest from his house to the cell Ter. IV, 1 המַפְרִיש מקצתוכ׳ he who sets aside one portion of what is due of Trumah or tithes. Num. R. s. 10 (ref. to Num. 6:11, ועשה) שיַפְרִשֵׁם הכהןוכ׳ that the priest when offering them designates them, one for a sin-offering Ib. (ref. to Prov. 23:32) מה צפעון זה מפריש … כך היין מפרישוכ׳ as the adder divides between life and death, so wine removes from the ways of life to those of death; Lev. R. s. 12 כךה׳ היין בין אדםוכ׳ so wine caused a separation between Adam and Eve; ה׳ היין בין נח לבניו לעבדות wine caused a division between Noah and his sons with regard to slavery; ה׳ היין בין אהרן ובניו למיתה wine caused a division between Aaron and his sons with regard to death; Yalk. Prov. 960. Tam.IV, 3 מן הכבד …ה׳ severed the lungs from the liver; a. fr.Part. pass. מוּפְרָש. Ned.I, 1 מוּפְרְשַׁנִי ממך I will be separated from thee (will have no dealings with thee, accept no favors); ib. 5a; a. e. 2) to go to sea. Gen. R. s. 13 היו מַפְרִישִׁין ליםוכ׳ were crossing the ocean; a. e.

    Jewish literature > פרש

  • 16 פָּרַש

    פָּרַש(b. h.) (to divide, separate, 1) (neut. verb) to go away, go aside, depart; to keep off. Yoma I, 5 הוא פוֹרֵש … פּוֹרְשִׁיןוכ׳ he turned aside and wept, and so did they. Y.Keth.I, 25d bot. ראו אותו פירש מציפורין they saw him come out of Sepphoris (so that he is presumably an inhabitant of Sepphoris); פירש מן הבתים they saw him leave one of the houses of Sepphoris. Num. R. s. 9 את פָּרַשְׁתְּ מדרךוכ׳ thou didst depart from the way (disregard the customs) of Israels daughters. Zeb.113a (play on פרשה, Num. 19:5) מקים שפּוֹרֶשֶׁת למיתהוכ׳ there where she departs for death, she shall be burnt. Y.M. Kat. I, 80b bot. (ref. to Lev. 13:45) כדי שתהא טומאה … פְּרוֹש: that the uncleanness itself may cry out …, ‘keep off; Y.Maas. Sh. V, beg. 55d; a. fr. 2) to pass, cross. Yalk. Prov. 946; Yalk. Num. 738 הספינות פּוֹרְשוֹת בים the ships make their way through the sea. 3) (act. verb) to separate, keep off. Num. R. s. 10 כשם שאדם פירש את עצמווכ׳ as a person keeps himself away (abstains) from the fruits of Orlah, so will those who misbehave towards their handmaids, be separated from the virtuous on the day of judgment.; a. fr.Part. pass. פָּרוּש, q. v. 4) (cmp. פָּרַט) to single out, specify, speak distinctly. Ib. (expl. יַפְלִא, Num. 6:2) כשיִפְרוֹש לנדורוכ׳ when he speaks out his vow, to the exclusion of him who thinks it in his heart; a. fr.Sifré Num. 24 עד שיפרוש לך … כדרך שפירשוכ׳ (Yalk. ib. 710 שיפרוט … שפרט), v. פָּרַט. Nif. נִפְרַש to be separated, kept away. Lev. R. s. 22 והן נִפְרָשִׁים מעבודה זרה and thus they will be kept away from idolatrous worship; a. e. Pi. פֵּירֵש 1) (neut. verb) to depart, withdraw; to abstain. Snh.82b היה לו … לפרוש ולא פי׳ Zimri might have withdrawn (from the woman), but he did not. Ib. a אם פ׳וכ׳ if Z. had withdrawn, and Phineas had slain him Pes.87b פ׳ מן האשה withdrew from contact with his wife. Gen. R. s. 20 שפֵּייְשָׁה היה מאדם that Eve was separated from Adam.Sabb.86b פירשה מן האיש the semen issued from a man.Pes.49b שנה ופ׳ קשהוכ׳ he that studied and gave it up, is the worst of all (in hostility to scholars); a. fr. 2) to go on a voyage; to cross the ocean (cmp. פָּלַג Hif.). Y.M. Kat. III, beg. 81c אסיר לפָרֵש לים הגדול it is forbidden to start on a sea voyage (during the festive week). Y.Yeb.XVI, 15d top עשיתי מְפָרֵשוכ׳ I was crossing Y.Meg.II, 73b top מְפָרְשֵׁי ימים voyagers on the sea; a. fr. 3) (act. verb) to separate. Gen. R. s. 22 אילו רצה המלך פֵּירְשָׁן ולא רצה המלך לפָרְשָׁן if the king desired it, he would separate them (the fighters), but the king does not wish to separate them; Yalk. ib. 38. 4) to specify, express clearly. Ib. א״א לפה לפָרְשוֹ no mouth can express it. Men.91a דמְפָרֵש when he (in making his vow) specified (‘sheep or ‘cattle), opp. בסתמא. Gen. R. s. 6 אנשי … פֵּירְשוּ איתו the men of the Great Assembly said it plainly. Snh.VII, 5 עד שיְפָרֵש השם until he mentions the Name expressly (uses the Tetragrammaton), opp. כִּינּוּי. Gitt.36a שיהו עדים מְפָרְשִׁין שמותיהן that witnesses must sign their full names; a. fr.Part. pass. מְפיֹרָש, f. מְפוֹרֶשֶׁת; pl. מְפוֹרָשִׁים, מְפוֹרָשִׁין; מְפוֹרָשוֹת. B. Kam.54b, a. fr. מה הפרט מפ׳, v. פְּרָט. B. Mets.94b שלישת בשואל מפ׳ that the third paragraph treats of a borrower, is explicitly stated (Ex. 22:13). Sot.38a, a. fr. שם המפ׳ the special Name (the Tetragrammaton), v. supra. Zeb.53a, v. סָתַם. Ḥag.22b ומה סתימות … מפ׳וכ׳ if your undefined teachings are so well-founded, how much more your explicit teachings; a. fr. 5) to explain, interpret, define. Ned.2b פתח … ומפרש ידות the Mishnah begins with kinnuyim …, and goes on explaining yadoth! Zeb.13a ואין לי לפרש and I am unable to explain (the reason of the distinction between receiving and sprinkling the blood); אני אֲפָרֵש I shall explain it. Ned.81a דבר זה … ולא פֵירְשוּהוּ עד שפֵּירְשוֹוכ׳ that question (Jer. 9:11) was asked of prophets and scholars, and they could not explain it, until the Lord himself explained it (ib. 12). Kat. 16b; Ber.18a לא פֵירְשוּ לך they did not interpret (the verse) to you; v. שָׁנָה. Gen. R. s. 31 ולא פ׳ and did not explain (of what material the serpent was to be made); Y.R. Hash. III, end, 59a; a. fr.Part. pass. as ab. Meg.3a, a. e. (ref. to Neh. 8:8) מפ׳ זה תרגים mforash means interpretation. Hithpa. הִתְפָּרֵש, Nithpa. נִתְפָּרֵש to be specified, defined; to be explained. Lev. R. s. 6 כל נביא שנתפ׳ a prophet; whose name is stated. Gen. R. l. c. בשלשה נ׳ ובאחד לא נ׳ in three places (in which עֲשֵׁה occurs) the command is specified, but in the fourth (Num. 21:8) it is not specified, v. supra. Yalk. Gen. 20 דבר שאינו מִתְפָּרֵש במקימווכ׳ a thing which is not defined in its original place but is defined i in another passage; a. e. Hif. הִפְרִיש 1) to separate; to set aside, dedicate. Yoma I, 1 מִפְרִישִׁין כהןוכ׳ they removed the high priest from his house to the cell Ter. IV, 1 המַפְרִיש מקצתוכ׳ he who sets aside one portion of what is due of Trumah or tithes. Num. R. s. 10 (ref. to Num. 6:11, ועשה) שיַפְרִשֵׁם הכהןוכ׳ that the priest when offering them designates them, one for a sin-offering Ib. (ref. to Prov. 23:32) מה צפעון זה מפריש … כך היין מפרישוכ׳ as the adder divides between life and death, so wine removes from the ways of life to those of death; Lev. R. s. 12 כךה׳ היין בין אדםוכ׳ so wine caused a separation between Adam and Eve; ה׳ היין בין נח לבניו לעבדות wine caused a division between Noah and his sons with regard to slavery; ה׳ היין בין אהרן ובניו למיתה wine caused a division between Aaron and his sons with regard to death; Yalk. Prov. 960. Tam.IV, 3 מן הכבד …ה׳ severed the lungs from the liver; a. fr.Part. pass. מוּפְרָש. Ned.I, 1 מוּפְרְשַׁנִי ממך I will be separated from thee (will have no dealings with thee, accept no favors); ib. 5a; a. e. 2) to go to sea. Gen. R. s. 13 היו מַפְרִישִׁין ליםוכ׳ were crossing the ocean; a. e.

    Jewish literature > פָּרַש

  • 17 תקן

    תְּקֵןch. sam(תקןto make straight, firm, right), to be firm, stand (corresp. to b. h. כּוּן, כָּנַן). Targ. Ps. 90:17 יִתְקְנַן ed. Ven. (Ms. יְתַקְנַן; ed. Wil. יִתּקְּנוּן Ithpa.). Targ. Prov. 22:18 נִיתְקְנִין (ed. Wil. נִתּקְּנוּן Ithpa.). Pa. תַּקֵּין 1) to establish. Targ. Ps. 9:8. Ib. 74:16 Ms. (ed. Af.). Targ. Is. 62:7. Targ. 2 Sam. 7:12; a. fr.Part. pass. מְתַקַּן. Targ. Jdg. 16:26 (not … קֵן). Targ. Ps. 89:38 (ed. Lag. מִיתַּקַּן Ithpa.); a. e. 2) to prepare, arrange, set in order; to improve, do a thing properly. Targ. Is. 40:13 (h. text תכן). Targ. O. Ex. 16:5. Targ. Prov. 6:8. Targ. Ps. 11:2; a. e.Targ. O. Deut. 12:5, read with ed. Berl. יִתָּקַן.Part. pass. as ab. Targ. Ez. 16:13 (not … קֵן). Ib. 18:12; a. fr.Keth.112a bot. מְתַקֵּן מתקליה repaired its offences (dangerous places on the road to Palestine); Yalk. Ps. 855. Tam.27b תַּקֵּין נפשך put thyself in order (regulate thy bowels). Sabb.33b איזיל אֲתַקֵּין מילתא I will go and remedy something (do something to benefit the community). Ib. איכא מילתא דבעי לתַקּוּנֵי is there anything that requires to be remedied? Zeb.15a אפשר לתַקּוּנָהּ it can be remedied. Ib. 76b תַּקּוּנֵי גברא שאני when a person is to be made fit (restored from a disqualification), we make an exception; Men.105b. Keth.85a, a fr. לתקוני שדרתיך, v. עֲוַת; a. fr.Esp. to make fit for use by separating the priestly gifts. Gen. R. s. 60 תַּקְּנַת איליןוכ׳ hast thou tithed those figs? Ib. תַּקַּנְתּוּהוּ have you tithed it (the barley)?; a. fr.Part. pass. as ab. Ib. אפשר … דלא מְתַקְּנַן is it possible that R. Z. should have eaten of them when they were not tithed?; a. fr. 3) to introduce, ordain, innovate, reform. Ber.33b אי לאו … ותַקְּנִינְהוּ בתפלהוכ׳ were it not that Moses had said them (the words, ‘O God, great, mighty and terrible), and the men of the Great Assembly had come and introduced them in the prayers, we could not dare to say them. Ib. תמני סרי תַּקּוּןוכ׳ eighteen benedictions they have ordained, nineteen they have not. Ib. 40b ברכה דלא תַקִּינוּ רבנן a benediction which the Rabbis have not introduced. B. Bath.90b רב פפא … ת׳ כיילאוכ׳ Rab Papa … introduced a measure of three Ḳfizas. Ib. אנא … תַּקִּינִי I have introduced a new measure; a. v. fr. Af. אַתְקֵין 1) to establish. Targ. Prov. 3:19. Targ. Is. 30:33; a. e. 2) to prepare, arrange, set in order (V. Pa.). Targ. Num. 10:33. Targ. Gen. 43:16. Targ. Ex. 30:7; a. fr. 3) to introduce, ordain, innovate, reform. R. Hash. 34a איתקיןר׳ אבהווכ׳ (read: אַתְ׳; Ms. M. הִתְקִין Hebr.) R. A. introduced the custom in Cæsaræa of sounding one Tḳiʿah, three notes of Shbarim, and one Tḳiʿah. Ib. מאי א׳ what has he improved (what has he achieved with his ordinance)? Gitt.86a א׳ רב יהודהוכ׳ Rab Judah introduced the formula for the sale of slaves: ‘this slave Y.Hag. I, 76c ר׳ יודה … למַתְקְנָא לוןוכ׳ (or למְתַקְּנָא, Pa.) R. Judah the Nasi sent out R. H …, that they should pass the towns … to institute teachers of Bible and of Mishnah for them; Midr. Till. to Ps. 127; Lam. R. introd., beg. דיפקון ויַתְקְנוּן קרייתאוכ׳ (or ויתַקְּנוּן) that they should go and improve (the education of) the towns in Palestine; a. fr. Ithpa. אִתַּקֵּין, אִיתַּקַּן; Ithpe. אִיתְּקֵין, אִיתְ׳ 1) to be established, confirmed; to be prepared, arranged. Targ. 1 Kings 2:46. Targ. Prov. 12:19. Ib. 19:29 (ed. Wil. מְתַ׳, part. pass. Pa.); a. fr. 2) to be prepared, dressed; to dress, adorn ones self. Targ. Hos. 2:15. Targ. II Esth. 5:1; a. fr. 3) to be instituted, ordained. B. Kam.82a עזרא תיקן … מִיתַּקְּנָא Ezra introduced this? was it not introduced before that (by Moses)?; a. e.

    Jewish literature > תקן

  • 18 תְּקֵן

    תְּקֵןch. sam(תקןto make straight, firm, right), to be firm, stand (corresp. to b. h. כּוּן, כָּנַן). Targ. Ps. 90:17 יִתְקְנַן ed. Ven. (Ms. יְתַקְנַן; ed. Wil. יִתּקְּנוּן Ithpa.). Targ. Prov. 22:18 נִיתְקְנִין (ed. Wil. נִתּקְּנוּן Ithpa.). Pa. תַּקֵּין 1) to establish. Targ. Ps. 9:8. Ib. 74:16 Ms. (ed. Af.). Targ. Is. 62:7. Targ. 2 Sam. 7:12; a. fr.Part. pass. מְתַקַּן. Targ. Jdg. 16:26 (not … קֵן). Targ. Ps. 89:38 (ed. Lag. מִיתַּקַּן Ithpa.); a. e. 2) to prepare, arrange, set in order; to improve, do a thing properly. Targ. Is. 40:13 (h. text תכן). Targ. O. Ex. 16:5. Targ. Prov. 6:8. Targ. Ps. 11:2; a. e.Targ. O. Deut. 12:5, read with ed. Berl. יִתָּקַן.Part. pass. as ab. Targ. Ez. 16:13 (not … קֵן). Ib. 18:12; a. fr.Keth.112a bot. מְתַקֵּן מתקליה repaired its offences (dangerous places on the road to Palestine); Yalk. Ps. 855. Tam.27b תַּקֵּין נפשך put thyself in order (regulate thy bowels). Sabb.33b איזיל אֲתַקֵּין מילתא I will go and remedy something (do something to benefit the community). Ib. איכא מילתא דבעי לתַקּוּנֵי is there anything that requires to be remedied? Zeb.15a אפשר לתַקּוּנָהּ it can be remedied. Ib. 76b תַּקּוּנֵי גברא שאני when a person is to be made fit (restored from a disqualification), we make an exception; Men.105b. Keth.85a, a fr. לתקוני שדרתיך, v. עֲוַת; a. fr.Esp. to make fit for use by separating the priestly gifts. Gen. R. s. 60 תַּקְּנַת איליןוכ׳ hast thou tithed those figs? Ib. תַּקַּנְתּוּהוּ have you tithed it (the barley)?; a. fr.Part. pass. as ab. Ib. אפשר … דלא מְתַקְּנַן is it possible that R. Z. should have eaten of them when they were not tithed?; a. fr. 3) to introduce, ordain, innovate, reform. Ber.33b אי לאו … ותַקְּנִינְהוּ בתפלהוכ׳ were it not that Moses had said them (the words, ‘O God, great, mighty and terrible), and the men of the Great Assembly had come and introduced them in the prayers, we could not dare to say them. Ib. תמני סרי תַּקּוּןוכ׳ eighteen benedictions they have ordained, nineteen they have not. Ib. 40b ברכה דלא תַקִּינוּ רבנן a benediction which the Rabbis have not introduced. B. Bath.90b רב פפא … ת׳ כיילאוכ׳ Rab Papa … introduced a measure of three Ḳfizas. Ib. אנא … תַּקִּינִי I have introduced a new measure; a. v. fr. Af. אַתְקֵין 1) to establish. Targ. Prov. 3:19. Targ. Is. 30:33; a. e. 2) to prepare, arrange, set in order (V. Pa.). Targ. Num. 10:33. Targ. Gen. 43:16. Targ. Ex. 30:7; a. fr. 3) to introduce, ordain, innovate, reform. R. Hash. 34a איתקיןר׳ אבהווכ׳ (read: אַתְ׳; Ms. M. הִתְקִין Hebr.) R. A. introduced the custom in Cæsaræa of sounding one Tḳiʿah, three notes of Shbarim, and one Tḳiʿah. Ib. מאי א׳ what has he improved (what has he achieved with his ordinance)? Gitt.86a א׳ רב יהודהוכ׳ Rab Judah introduced the formula for the sale of slaves: ‘this slave Y.Hag. I, 76c ר׳ יודה … למַתְקְנָא לוןוכ׳ (or למְתַקְּנָא, Pa.) R. Judah the Nasi sent out R. H …, that they should pass the towns … to institute teachers of Bible and of Mishnah for them; Midr. Till. to Ps. 127; Lam. R. introd., beg. דיפקון ויַתְקְנוּן קרייתאוכ׳ (or ויתַקְּנוּן) that they should go and improve (the education of) the towns in Palestine; a. fr. Ithpa. אִתַּקֵּין, אִיתַּקַּן; Ithpe. אִיתְּקֵין, אִיתְ׳ 1) to be established, confirmed; to be prepared, arranged. Targ. 1 Kings 2:46. Targ. Prov. 12:19. Ib. 19:29 (ed. Wil. מְתַ׳, part. pass. Pa.); a. fr. 2) to be prepared, dressed; to dress, adorn ones self. Targ. Hos. 2:15. Targ. II Esth. 5:1; a. fr. 3) to be instituted, ordained. B. Kam.82a עזרא תיקן … מִיתַּקְּנָא Ezra introduced this? was it not introduced before that (by Moses)?; a. e.

    Jewish literature > תְּקֵן

  • 19 statio

    stătĭo, ōnis, f. [sto], a standing, a standing still.
    I.
    Lit. (so very rare;

    not in Cic.): navis, quae manet in statione,

    remains standing, stands still, does not move, Lucr. 4, 388; so,

    manere in statione,

    id. 4, 396; 5, 478; 5, 518:

    in statione locata nubila,

    id. 6, 193: varas In statione manus et pugnae membra paravi, in a firm posture (for fighting), Ov. M. 9, 34:

    numquam id (sidus) stationem facere,

    stands still, Plin. 2, 17, 15, § 77:

    stationes matutinas facere,

    id. 2, 15, 12, § 59:

    solus immobilem stationis gradum retinens,

    Val. Max. 3, 2, 23:

    terrae,

    Manil. 2, 70.—
    * B.
    Trop., that which is established by custom or prescription, a transl. of the Gr. thematismos, Vitr. 1, 2, 5.—
    II.
    Transf., in concr., a place where persons or things stay or abide, a station, post, an abode, residence.
    A.
    In gen. (mostly poet. and in post-Aug. prose):

    Athenis statio mea nunc placet,

    Cic. Att. 6, 9, 5:

    quā positus fueris in statione, mane,

    Ov. F. 2, 674; cf. id. ib. 5, 719:

    principio sedes apibus statioque petenda,

    Verg. G. 4, 8:

    apricis statio gratissima mergis,

    id. A. 5, 128:

    equorum,

    i. e. a stall, Pall. 1, 21, 2; so,

    jumentorum,

    Dig. 7, 1, 13 fin.:

    plerique in stationibus sedent tempusque audiendis fabulis conterunt,

    in public places, Plin. Ep. 1, 13, 2:

    stationes circumeo,

    id. ib. 2, 9, 5:

    quod tabernas tris de domo suo circa forum civitatibus ad stationem locasset,

    Suet. Ner. 37:

    thermae, stationes, omne theatrum,

    Juv. 11, 4; Gell. 13, 13, 1:

    stationes municipiorum,

    Plin. 16, 44, 86, § 236:

    si ad stationem vel tabernam ventum sit,

    Dig. 47, 10, 15, § 7:

    stationes hibernae,

    winter-quarters, Amm. 14, 1, 1.—
    b.
    Poet., of things, place, position:

    pone recompositas in statione comas,

    in their place, Ov. Am. 1, 7, 68; id. A. A. 3, 434:

    permutata rerum statione, Petr. poët. 120, 99: umoris,

    Pall. 1, 43.—
    B.
    In partic.
    1.
    In milit. lang., a post, station (v. custodiae, vigilia):

    cohortes ex statione et praesidio emissae,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 42:

    ii, qui pro portis castrorum in statione erant... Cohortes quae in stationibus erant, etc.,

    id. ib. 4, 32; 5, 15; 6, 37;

    6, 38: in stationem succedere,

    to relieve, id. ib. 4, 32:

    stationem inire,

    Tac. A. 13, 35:

    relinquere,

    Verg. A. 9, 222:

    deserere,

    Suet. Aug. 24:

    habere,

    Liv. 35, 29:

    quique primi transierant, in statione erant, dum traicerent ceteri,

    on guard, Curt. 7, 5, 18.— Transf.: suis vicibus capiebant bina (lumina Argi) quietem;

    Cetera servabant atque in statione manebant,

    kept at their posts, Ov. M. 1, 627; 2, 115.— Trop.:

    de praesidio et statione vitae decedere,

    Cic. Sen. 20, 73:

    functo longissimā statione mortali,

    Vell. 2, 131, 2:

    imperii statione relictā,

    Ov. Tr. 2, 219; Vell. 2, 124, 2; Tac. Or. 17; Suet. Claud. 38.—
    b.
    Transf., like our post, watch, guard, for those who are stationed to watch, who stand guard, sentries, sentinels, outposts, pickets:

    ut stationes dispositas haberent,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 16; 7, 69 fin.:

    ut minus intentae diurnae stationes ac nocturnae vigiliae essent,

    Liv. 9, 24, 5; 25, 38, 16; cf. in sing.:

    ad stationem Romanam in portā segniter agentem vigilias perveniunt,

    id. 10, 32, 7:

    dispositā statione per ripas Tiberis,

    Suet. Tib. 72:

    crebrae,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 73:

    custodiae stationesque equitum,

    id. ib. 1, 59:

    statione militum assumptā,

    i. e. body-guard, lifeguard, Suet. Tib. 24; so,

    militum,

    id. Ner. 21; 34; 47.—
    2.
    Transf., in gen., a station, office, position, in government, etc. (post-class.):

    in hac statione, i. e. the imperial office,

    Spart. Ael. Verr. 4:

    statio imperatoria,

    Lampr. Comm. 1:

    Augusta,

    Capitol. Clod. Alb. 2: regia, Vulc. 7; Capitol. Verr. 8.—
    3.
    Naut. t. t., an anchorage, roadstead, road, bay, inlet (syn. portus), Lentul. ap. Cic. Fam. 12, 15, 2:

    quietam nactus stationem,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 6; 3, 8; 1, 56 fin.; Liv. 10, 2, 6; 28, 6, 9; 31, 33, 3; Verg. G. 4, 421; id. A. 2, 23 al.—
    4.
    A place of residence, a post, station of the fiscal officers of a province; also, for the officers themselves, Cod. Th. 12, 6, 19; Cod. Just. 4, 31, 1; 10, 5, 1; Inscr. Orell. 3207; 4107.—
    5.
    A post-station, post-house, Inscr. Murat. 1015; Morcell. Stil. Inscr. Lat. 1, p. 421.—
    6.
    A religious meeting, assembly of the Christians:

    die stationis, nocte vigiliae meminerimus,

    Tert. Or. 29:

    stationes in vesperam producere,

    id. adv. Psych. 1; so id. ib. 10; id. ad Ux. 2, 4.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > statio

  • 20 celeber

    cĕlĕber, ēbris, ēbre, adj. ( masc. celebris, Auct. Her. 2, 4, 7; Tac. A. 2, 88 fin.; 13, 47; 14, 19; Curt. 5, 1, 18; Gell. 17, 21, 10; comp. very rare, but sup. freq.) [perh. Sanscr. çru-, audire; Gr. kleos; v. Corss. Beitr. p. 368], that which contains a multitude, numerous; hence,
    I.
    Where there is a multitude, or where a multitude comes together; of places, much frequented or resorted to, populous, abounding in, rich in (syn.: plenus, frequens; opp. desertus): celeber poluandros, Gloss. Vet.:

    in locis illa fortuita: culti an inculti, celebres an deserti, etc.,

    Cic. Part. Or. 10, 36; id. Sest. 67, 140; id. Verr. 2, 2, 65, § 159; id. Mil. 24, 66; Auct. Her. 2, 4, 7:

    loco celebri an secreto,

    Quint. 11, 1, 47:

    in foro celeberrimo, tantā frequentiā,

    most frequented, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 58, § 133;

    but: celeberrimo fori,

    at the time when the Forum was most frequented, Tac. A. 4, 67 fin.:

    via,

    Cato, R. R. 1, 3:

    portus celeberrimus atque plenissimus navium,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 33:

    celeberrimo virorum mulierumque conventu,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 48, § 107; id. Phil. 14, 6, 16; cf. id. Pis. 15, 34:

    celebri urbe et copiosā,

    id. Arch. 3, 4:

    celeberrimo loco (urbis) elatus,

    Nep. Dion, 10, 3; cf. Plin. Ep. 2, 7, 7; 8, 6, 14:

    pars oppidi,

    Suet. Aug. 1:

    oraculum,

    Cic. Div. 1, 19, 37:

    convivium,

    Tac. A. 14, 48; id. H. 1, 81:

    celeberrima fontibus Ide,

    Ov. M. 2, 218:

    celeberrimus ilice lucus,

    id. Am. 3, 5, 3.—
    II.
    Meton.
    A.
    That is celebrated, honored by a great assembly, procession, train, etc.; renowned, distinguished, celebrated, famous (syn.: clarus, notus, nobilis; in prose and poetry, partic. since the Aug. per.).
    (α).
    With abl.:

    gentis Aquitanae celeber Messala triumphis,

    Tib. 2, 1, 33:

    dies omni caerimoniarum genere,

    Liv. 25, 12, 15; cf.

    ludi,

    Suet. Aug. 44:

    Tiresias famā,

    Ov. M. 3, 339:

    Daedalus ingenio artis,

    id. ib. 8, 159:

    vir arte grammaticā,

    Plin. 24, 17, 102, § 167:

    quisque ingenio,

    Tac. Agr. 1:

    tribunus plebis opibus, gratiā, etc.,

    Vell. 2, 18, 2:

    pons Mulvius nocturnis illecebris,

    Tac. A. 13, 47.—
    (β).
    Absol.:

    dies celeberrimi laetissimique,

    most solemn, festive, Cic. Lael. 3, 12:

    res totā Siciliā celeberrima atque notissima,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 25, § 61: celebre per Hispaniam responsum, Liv. 21, 19, 8: fama inter barbaros id. 27, 33, 1:

    nomen ad posteros,

    id. 1, 3, 8:

    viri,

    id. 26, 27, 16:

    duces,

    Vell. 2, 17, 2:

    Arminius,

    Tac. A. 2, 88:

    Diana,

    Hor. C. 2, 12, 20:

    dea,

    Ov. M. 1, 747; cf. id. ib. 5, 412:

    templa,

    Quint. 1, 4, 16: Aper et Secundus, celeberrima tum ingema fori nostri. Tac. Or. 2. —
    (γ).
    With in:

    celeberrimus fuit in hoc genere Sosus,

    Plin. 36, 25, 60, § 184.—
    B.
    Often repeated, numerous, frequent (very rare): celebri gradu, with double quick step, Att. ap. Non. p. 89, 25 (Trag. Rel. v. 25 Rib.):

    verba celeberrima,

    often repeated, Ov. A. A. 2, 705:

    vox,

    id. P. 1, 9, 25:

    lapis celeber trans maria et quondam in Campania,

    Plin. 34, 1, 2, § 2:

    nomina in annalibus,

    Gell. 7 (6), 7, 1.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > celeber

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Assembly Hall (Washington, Mississippi) — Assembly Hall U.S. National Register of Historic Places Mississippi Landmark …   Wikipedia

  • The Legislative Assembly and the fall of the French monarchy — The French Revolution was a period in the history of France covering the years 1789 to 1799, in which republicans overthrew the Bourbon monarchy and the Roman Catholic Church perforce underwent radical restructuring. This article covers the one… …   Wikipedia

  • The Irish (in Countries Other Than Ireland) —     The Irish (in countries other than Ireland)     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Irish (in countries other than Ireland)     I. IN THE UNITED STATES     Who were the first Irish to land on the American continent and the time of their arrival are …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Sims 3 — Developer(s) The Sims Studio Publisher(s) Electronic Arts …   Wikipedia

  • The Cross and Crucifix in Liturgy —     The Cross and Crucifix in Liturgy     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Cross and Crucifix in Liturgy     (1) Material Objects in Liturgical Use;     (2) Liturgical Forms connected with Them;     (3) Festivals Commemorative of the Holy Cross;… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Fixed Period — (1882) is a satirical dystopian novel by Anthony Trollope.IntroductionIt was first published in six instalments in Blackwood s Magazine in 1881 82 and in book form in 1882. In the same year there also appeared U.S. and Tauchnitz editions of the… …   Wikipedia

  • The Clean Tech Revolution — The Clean Tech Revolution: The Next Big Growth and Investment Opportunity , is a 2007 book by Ron Pernick and Clint Wilder, who argue that commercializing clean technologies is a profitable enterprise that is moving steadily into mainstream… …   Wikipedia

  • Assembly of the International Space Station — An artist s impression of the International Space Station s configuration as of March 2011 …   Wikipedia

  • Assembly Hall (Champaign) — Infobox Stadium stadium name = Assembly Hall| nickname = location = 1800 South 1st St Champaign, Illinois 61820 6950 broke ground = opened = March 2, 1963 closed = demolished = owner = University of Illinois operator = University of Illinois… …   Wikipedia

  • Assembly Hall — An assembly hall is a building used for the purposes of holding deliberative assemblies. Some Christian denominations call their meeting places assembly halls. Elders and ministers of Presbyterian churches gather in assembly halls for their… …   Wikipedia

  • The Bahamas — This article is about the country. For the Canadian singer guitarist, see Bahamas (musician). Commonwealth of the Bahamas …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»